®
中
文
MICRO COMPONENT SYSTEM
微型組合音響
UX-P450
—Consists of CA-UXP450 and SP-UXP450
由
及
組成
SP-UXP450
—
CA-UXP450
SUPER VIDEO
INSTRUCTIONS
使用說明書
GVT0129-008A
[US/UN]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Introduction .....................................................2 On-Screen Disc Operations .......................... 24
Precautions ......................................................................2
How to Read This Manual...............................................2
On-screen Bar Information............................................24
Operations Using the On-screen Bar.............................25
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures.................................27
Operations on the CONTROL Screen...........................27
Getting Started.................................................3
Step 1: Unpack ................................................................3
Step 2: Prepare the Remote Control ................................3
Step 3: Hook Up ..............................................................4
Setting the Video Output Selector...................................6
Changing the Scanning Mode .........................................6
Advanced Tape Operations.......................... 29
Recording on a Tape......................................................29
Synchronized Disc Recording.......................................30
Timer Operations.......................................... 31
Before Operating the System..........................7
Playable Disc Types ........................................................7
Display Indicators............................................................8
Setting the Timer...........................................................31
Setup Menu Operations................................ 33
Operating Procedure......................................................33
Restricting the Review—Parental Lock........................37
Daily Operations—Playback ........................10
Listening to the Radio ...................................................11
Playing Back a Tape......................................................12
Playing Back a Disc.......................................................12
Additional Information................................. 39
Learning More about This System ................................39
Maintenance ..................................................................41
Troubleshooting.............................................................42
Language Code List.......................................................43
Country/Area Codes List...............................................44
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals .....................45
Specifications ................................................................46
Parts Index.....................................................................46
Daily Operations—Sound & Other
Adjustments ...................................................15
Adjusting the Volume....................................................15
Adjusting the Sound ......................................................15
Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound
Increase Level............................................................16
Changing the Display Brightness ..................................16
Changing the Picture Tone ............................................16
Setting the Clock ...........................................................17
Turning Off the Power Automatically...........................17
Unique DVD/VCD Operations .....................18
Selecting the View Angle..............................................18
Selecting the Subtitle Language ....................................18
Selecting the Audio Track.............................................19
Playing Back a Bonus Group ........................................19
Special Effect Playback.................................................20
Advanced Disc Operations............................21
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play..........21
Playing at Random—Random Play...............................22
Playing Repeatedly........................................................23
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock ........................23
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Precautions
How to Read This Manual
To make this manual as simple and easy-to-understand as
possible, we have adapted the following methods:
• Button and control operations are explained as listed in the
table below.
Installation
• Install in a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor
too cold—between 5°C and 35°C.
• Install the System in a location with adequate ventilation to
prevent internal heat buildup inside the System.
•
Some related tips and notes are explained later in the
sections “Additional Information” and
“Troubleshooting,” but not in the same section
explaining the operations. If you want to know more
about the functions, or if you have a doubt about the
functions, go to these sections and you will find the
answers.
DO NOT install the System in a location near
heat sources, or in a place subject to direct
sunlight, excessive dust or vibration.
• Leave sufficient distance between the System and the TV.
• Keep the speakers away from the TV to avoid interference
with TV.
Indicates that you press the button
briefly
.
Power sources
• When unplugging the System from the wall outlet, always
pull on the plug, not the AC power cord.
Indicates that you press the button
briefly and repeatedly until an
option you want is selected.
DO NOT handle the AC power cord with wet
hands.
Indicates that you press one of the
buttons.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lenses inside the System in
the following cases:
• After starting to heat the room
• In a damp room
• If the System is brought directly from a cold to a warm
place
Indicates that you press and hold the
button for specified seconds.
• The number inside the arrow
indicates the period of press (in this
example, 2 seconds).
2 sec.
• If no number is inside the arrow,
press and hold until the entire
procedure is complete or until you
get a result you want.
Should this occur, the System may malfunction. In this case,
leave the System turned on for a few hours until the moisture
evaporates, unplug the AC power cord, then plug it in again.
Others
Indicates that you turn the control
toward the specified direction(s).
• Should any metallic object or liquid fall into the System,
unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer before
operating any further.
DO NOT disassemble the System since there
are no user serviceable parts inside.
Indicates that this operation is only
possible using the remote control.
Remote
ONLY
• If you are not going to operate the System for an extended
period of time, unplug the AC power cord from the wall
outlet.
Indicates that this operation is only
possible using the buttons and controls on
the main unit.
Main Unit
ONLY
If anything goes wrong, unplug the AC power cord and
consult your dealer.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Step 1: Unpack
After unpacking, check to be sure that you have all the
following items. The number in parentheses indicates the
quantity of each piece supplied.
• FM antenna (1)
Step 1:Unpack the package and
check the accessories.
• AM loop antenna (1)
• Composite video cord (1)
• Remote control (1)
• Batteries (2)
• AC plug adaptor (1)
If any item is missing, consult your dealer immediately.
Step 2: Prepare the Remote Control
Insert the batteries into the remote control by matching the
polarity (+ and –) correctly.
1
Step 2:Prepare the remote control.
R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F)
2
Step 3:Hook up the components such
as AM/FM antennas, speakers,
etc. (see pages 4 to 6).
3
• DO NOT use an old battery together with a
new one.
• DO NOT use different types of batteries
together.
Finally plug the AC power cord.
• If the wall outlet does not match the AC plug, use the
supplied AC plug adaptor.
• DO NOT expose batteries to heat or flame.
• DO NOT leave the batteries in the battery
compartment when you are not going to use
the remote control for an extended period of
time. Otherwise, the remote control will be
damaged from battery leakage.
Now you can operate the System.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step 3: Hook Up
If you need more detailed information, see page 6.
Illustrations of the input/output terminals below are typical
examples.
When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals
since the terminal names actually printed on the rear may vary.
Before connecting optical digital
cord
Remove the protective
cap from the DVD
OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUT terminal.
Turn the power off to all components before connections.
For better FM/AM reception
AM loop antenna
Keep it connected.
Outdoor FM
antenna
Vinyl-covered wire (not supplied)
(not supplied)
Extend it horizontally.
Disconnect the supplied FM antenna, and connect to an outdoor FM
antenna using a 75 Ω wire with coaxial type connector.
VIDEO INPUT
VIDEO INPUT
Yellow
Composite video cord (supplied)
OR
S-video cord (not supplied)
OR
TV
VIDEO INPUT
Y
Green
Blue
P
B
P
R
Red
Component video cord (not supplied)
AV COMPU LINK cord (not supplied)
(cord with monaural mini plug)
AV
COMPU LINK
• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control
system” on page 6.
OPTICAL
DIGITAL IN
DECODER
Optical digital cord (not supplied)
AUDIO OUT
White
LEFT
RIGHT
AUX
Red
Audio cord (not supplied)
VCR, etc.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Turn it until the best reception is
obtained.
Before plugging in the System
Set the correct voltage for your area with the voltage
selector on the rear.
Use a screwdriver to rotate the voltage selector so
that the voltage marker is pointing at the same
voltage as where you are plugging in the unit. (See
also the back cover page.)
Voltage marker
FM antenna (supplied)
Extend it so that you can obtain
the best reception.
O P E N
P U S H
R E V E R S E
O
T
U
A
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
OUT
SELECT
PA
L
NTSC
Y
PB
PR
DO NOT plug in before setting
the voltage selector and all
connection procedures are
complete.
To a wall outlet
Plug the AC power cord only after all connections and
selector settings on the rear are complete.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To connect the AM loop antenna
IMPORTANT
The speakers are magnetically shielded to avoid color
distortions on TVs. However, if not installed properly, it
may cause color distortions. So, pay attention to the
following when installing the speakers.
1 Hold
• When placing the speakers near a TV set, turn off the
TV’s main power switch or unplug it before installing the
speakers. Then wait at least 30 minutes before turning on
the TV’s main power switch again.
3 Release
Some TVs may still be affected even though you have
followed the above. If this happens, move the speakers
away from the TV.
2 Insert
• If the AM loop antenna wire or speaker cords are covered
with vinyl, remove the vinyl to expose the tip of the
antenna by twisting the vinyl.
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other
terminals, connecting cords and power cord.Also, keep the
antennas away from metallic parts of the System,
connecting cords, and theAC power cord. This could cause
poor reception.
AV COMPU LINK remote control system
This system allows you to use JVC’s TV with simple
operations; by starting playing back a disc, the TV
automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the
appropriate position so that you can view the playback
picture.
• To use AV COMPU LINK, you need to connect the
System and the TV by using a cord with monaural mini-
plugs (not supplied) in addition to the video input/output
connection through the COMPONENT jacks, S-VIDEO
jack or VIDEO (composite) jack on the rear.
To connect the speaker cords
Connect the right speaker to the RIGHT terminals, and the
left speaker to the LEFT terminals.
1 Hold
Setting the Video Output Selector
You can select the video output to match it to the color
system of your TV.
3 Release
NTSC: For an NTSC TV.
PAL: For a PAL TV.
2 Insert
VIDEO
OUT
SELECT
• When using a multi-color system
TV, either position will work.
• When connecting the speaker cords, match the polarity of
the speaker terminals: Red cord to (+) and black cord
to (–).
PAL
NTSC
Remote
ONLY
Changing the Scanning Mode
This System supports progressive scanning.
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to
each terminal.
• DO NOT allow the conductor of the speaker
cords to be in touch with the metallic parts of
the System.
If you connect a progressive TV through the COMPONENT
jacks, you can enjoy a high quality picture from the built-in
DVD player by selecting “PROGRE.”
PROGRESSIVE
PROGRE
0
INTER
(at the same time)
PROGRE Progressive scanning. For a progressive TV.
INTER
Interlaced scanning. For a conventional TV.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Operating the System
DVD Video—digital audio formats
The System can play back the following digital audio
Playable Disc Types
This unit has been designed to play back the following discs:
formats.
•
Linear PCM: Uncompressed digital audio, the same
format used for CDs and most studio masters.
Dolby Digital: Compressed digital audio, developed by
Dolby Laboratories, which enables multi-channel encode
to create the realistic surround sound.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems): Compressed digital
audio, developed by Digital Theater Systems, Inc., which
enables multi-channel like Dolby Digital. As the
compression ratio is lower than for Dolby Digital, it
provides wider dynamic range and better separation.
Region
Code*
Number
Video
Format
Disc Type
Mark (Logo)
•
DVD Video
DVD Audio
3
or
ALL
•
NTSC
or
PAL
Video CD
(VCD)
DIGITAL VIDEO
When playing a multi-channel encoded DVD, the System
properly converts these multi-channel signals into 2
channels, and emits the downmixed sound from the
speakers.
Super Video
CD (SVCD)
SUPER VIDEO
COMPACT
•
To enjoy the powerful sound of these multi-channel
encoded DVDs, connect a proper decoder or an amplifier
with a proper built-in decoder to the digital output terminal
on the rear.
Audio CD
DIGITAL AUDIO
CD-R
The System can play back CD-R or CD-RW
recorded in the Audio CD, Video CD, SVCD,
MP3, WMA, and JPEG formats.
CD-RW
DVD-R
The System can play back DVD-R or DVD-
RW recorded in the video format.
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “MLP Lossless”, and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• “DTS” and “DTS2.0+DIGITAL OUT” are registered
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents
and other intellectual property rights owned by
Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be authorized by
Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
DVD-RW
In addition to the above discs, this System can play back audio
data recorded on CD Text, CD-G (CD Graphics), and CD-Extra.
• The following discs cannot be played back:
DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD+R, DVD+RW, CD-I (CD-I
Ready), CD-ROM, Photo CD, etc.
Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage the
speakers.
• In this manual, “file” and “track” are interchangeably used
for MP3/WMA/JPEG operations.
* Note on Region Code
DVD players and DVDs have their own Region Code numbers.
CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH
DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY
COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY
CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE
PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 OR 625 PROGRESSIVE
SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED
THAT THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO
THE ‘STANDARD DEFINITION’ OUTPUT. IF THERE
ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR TV SET
COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p AND
625p DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR
CUSTOMER SERVICE CENTER.
This System can play back only DVDs recorded with the NTSC
or PAL color system whose Region Code numbers including
“3.”
EX.:
If a DVD with the improper Region Code numbers is loaded,
“RGN ERR (Region Code Error)” appears on the display and
playback will not start.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display Indicators
The indications on the display teach you a lot of things while you are operating the System.
Before operating the System, be familiar with when and how the indicator illuminates on the display.
1 2 3
4
5
6
7
SLEEP MONO ST MP3 WMA 3DPHONIC REC
123 REC
RANDOM
PRGM ALL BONUS B.S.P.
A.STANDBY
8
9
p
q
w
e
1 Rhythm Ax indicator
p BONUS indicator
• Lights when Rhythm Ax is activated.
• Lights when a DVD Audio with a bonus group is
2 Daily Timer indicators
detected.
•
: lights when Daily Timer stands by or is being preset.
q B.S.P. (Browsable Still Picture) indicator
• Lights when Browsable Still Pictures are detected while
playing a DVD Audio.
• 1/2/3: lights when a Daily Timer (1, 2, or 3) stands by;
flashes while setting or working.
• REC: lights when the Recording Timer stands by; flashes
while setting or working.
SLEEP indicator
w Main display
• While listening to radio: Band (or preset number) and
station frequency appear.
3
• Lights when the Sleep Timer is activated.
4 FM reception indicators
• While selecting “AUX”: “AUX” appears.
• While playing a tape: “TAPE” appears.
• While playing a disc: See “Indications on the main
display while operating a disc” on page 9.
e A(auto). STANDBY indicator
• Lights when Auto Standby is activated.
• Flashes when disc playback stops with Auto Standby
activated.
• MONO: lights while receiving an FM stereo station in
monaural.
• ST (stereo): lights while an FM stereo station with
sufficient signal strength is tuned in.
5 MP3/WMA indicators
• MP3: lights when an MP3 track is detected.
• WMA: lights when a WMA track is detected.
6 3D PHONIC indicator
• Lights when 3D Phonic is activated.
7 REC indicator
• Lights while recording.
8 Tape operation indicators
•
2 3 (tape direction):
–Lights to indicate the current tape running direction.
–Flashes slowly during playback and recording.
–Flashes quickly while rewinding a tape.
(reverse mode):
•
–
–
–
: tape play continues endlessly.
: tape automatically reverses once.
: tape play stops at the end of one side.
9Disc operation indicators
• RANDOM: lights when Random Play is activated.
• PRGM (program): lights when Program Play is activated.
•
(repeat)/ALL:
–
–
: lights when Disc Repeat is activated.
: lights when any Repeat other than the above is
ALL
activated.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indications on the main display while operating a disc
While playing back a disc:
While disc play is stopped:
• DVD Video:
• DVD Video:
Current chapter no.
Elapsed playing time
Total title no.
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current title and
chapter numbers for a few seconds.
• DVD Audio:
• DVD Audio:
Track no.
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time
Total group no.
Group no.
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group
and track numbers for a few seconds.
• Audio CD:
• Audio CD:
Current track no.
Total track no.
Total playing time
Elapsed playing time
• SVCD/VCD:
• SVCD/VCD:
Total track no.
Total playing time*
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time*
* Changes to “PBC” when stopping PBC playback.
* “PBC” appears while playing a disc with PBC.
• MP3/WMA:
• MP3/WMA:
Current track no.
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time
Current group no.
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group
and track numbers for a few seconds.
• JPEG:
• JPEG:
Current group no.
Current group no.
Current file no.
Current file no.
• If Resume is turned “ON” (see page 36), “RESUME” appears when you stop playback.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daily Operations—Playback
In this manual, the operation using the remote control
is mainly explained; however, you can use the buttons
and controls on the main unit if they have the same (or
similar) name and marks.
1
10 keys
1 Turn on the power.
The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit lights in
green.
SET
ENTER
TOP MENU
MENU
,
• Without pressing STANDBY/ON
, the System
,
,
turns on by pressing one of the source selecting
buttons in the next step.
RETURN
2
8
7
2 Select the source.
1/¡
3D PHONIC
Playback automatically starts if the selected source is
ready to start.
GROUP/TITLE
4/¢
• If you press AUX, start playback source on the
external component.
3
SHIFT
3 Adjust the volume.
4 Operate the target source as explained
later.
To turn off (stand by) the unit
STANDBY/ON
1
2
The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit
STANDBY/ON
lights in red.
• A small amount of power is always
consumed even while on standby.
For private listening
Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the
main unit. The sound will no longer come out of the
speakers. Be sure to turn down the volume before
connecting or putting the headphones.
• Disconnecting the headphones will activate the
speakers again.
DVD/CD
3
4
DO NOT turn off (stand by) the System with
the volume set to an extremely high level;
Otherwise, the sudden blast of sound can
damage your hearing, speakers and/or
headphones when you turn on the System or
start playback.
VOLUME
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To tune in to a station
While FM or AM is selected...
Listening to the Radio
Main Unit
ONLY
Remote control:
Main unit:
To set the AM tuner interval spacing
Before operating the tuner, it is required to select the
appropriate AM space interval used for your area.
2 sec.
2 sec.
GROUP/TITLE
DOWN
UP
1 Select the AM band.
FM
AM
Frequency starts changing on the display.
When a station (frequency) with sufficient signal strength is
tuned in, the frequency stops changing.
• When you repeatedly press the button, the frequency changes
step by step.
2 Turn off the power.
STANDBY/ON
To stop searching manually, press either button.
Remote
ONLY
If the received FM station is hard to listen
FM MODE
3 Select the appropriate AM space interval for your
9
area.
• You can only use the button and the control on the front
panel.
(at the same time)
STANDBY/ON
DOWN
The MONO indicator lights on the display. Reception will
improve though stereo effect is lost—Monaural reception
mode.
To restore the stereo effect, press the button again (the
MONO indicator goes off).
AM 9KHZ
(9 kHz interval)
While holding...
Remote
ONLY
To preset the stations
You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.
STANDBY/ON
UP
1 Tune in to a station you want to preset.
• You can also store the monaural reception mode for FM
preset stations if selected.
AM 10KHZ
(10 kHz interval)
2 Activate the preset number entry mode.
While holding...
SET
• Finish the following process while the indication on the
display is flashing.
To select the band (FM or AM)
FM
AM
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Select a preset number for the station you store.
To start:
To stop:
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
Examples:
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
To select preset number 5, press
5.
To select preset number 15,
press +10, then 5.
To select preset number 30,
press +10, +10, then 10.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
9
7
To rewind tape:
Before or after play...
GROUP/TITLE
10
10
Rewind the tape to the right.
Rewind the tape to the left.
• You can also use the ¡ or 1 buttons.
4 Store the station.
SET
To change the tape running direction
3 (forward play)
2 (reverse play)
Remote
ONLY
To tune in to a preset station
1 Select the band (FM or AM).
To reverse the tape automatically
FM
AM
REV. MODE
7
2 Select a preset number for the station you store.
(at the same time)
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
• You can also use the ¡ or
1 buttons.
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
Tape is played from the forward side to the
reverse side. When the reverse side is played
back, playback stops.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
9
7
Tape is automatically reversed, and playback
repeats until you stop it.
10
10
Tape will not be reversed. When the current
side of the tape reaches its end, playback stops.
Playing Back a Tape
Playing Back a Disc
To insert a tape
IMPORTANT: Before playing a disc, make sure of the
following...
• Turn on the TV and select an appropriate input mode on
the TV to view the pictures or on-screen displays on the
TV screen.
You can play back tapes of types I, II, and IV.
Push
Insert
Close
• For disc playback, you can change the initial setting to
your preference. See “Setup Menu Operations” on
page 33.
If “
” appears on the TV screen when you press a
With the tape side facing outside
button, the disc cannot accept the operation you have
tried to do, or data required for that operation is not
recorded on the disc.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before operating a disc, be familiar how a disc is recorded.
• DVD Video comprises of “Titles” which includes
On-screen guide icons
“
“
Chapters,” DVD Audio/MP3/WMA/JPEG comprise of
Groups” which includes “Tracks,” and CD/SVCD/VCD
• During DVD Video playback, the following icons may
appear on the TV:
comprise of only “Tracks.”
• For JPEG playback, see “Operations on the CONTROL
Screen” on page 27.
At the beginning of a scene containing multi-
angle views.
At the beginning of a scene containing multi-
audio sounds.
To insert a disc
You can insert a disc while playing another source.
At the beginning of a scene containing multi-
subtitles.
• The following icons will be also shown on the TV to
indicate your current operation.
,
,
,
,
,
To close the disc tray, press 0 again.
Remote
ONLY
• If you press DVD/CD 3, disc tray closes automatically
and playback starts (depending on how the disc is
programmed internally).
To select a title/group
While playing...
GROUP/TITLE
To start:
To pause:
To stop:
DVD/CD
(at the same time)
To release, press
DVD/CD 3.
• Group name appears for MP3/WMA discs.
•
While playing DVD/SVCD/VCD: This System can store
the stop point, and when you start playback again by
pressing DVD/CD 3 (even while on standby), it starts
from the position where you have stopped—Resume Play.
(“RESUME” appears on the display when you stop
playback.)
To select a chapter/track
While playing...
• First time you press 4, you
GROUP/TITLE
can go back to the beginning of
the current chapter/track.
To stop completely while Resume is activated, press 7
twice. (To cancel Resume, see “RESUME” on page 36.)
• When operating the System, the on-screen guide icon (see
the following table) appears on the TV.
To deactivate the on-screen guide icons, see “ON
SCREEN GUIDE” on page 36.
Remote
ONLY
To locate a particular portion
While playing a disc except MP3/WMA...
+
SLOW
SLOW
–
x2
x2
x10
x10
x20
x20
x60
x60
x5
x5
• No sound comes out while searching on DVD Video/
SVCD/VCD.
To return to normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 For SVCD/VCD with PBC:
Remote
ONLY
While playing a disc with PBC, “PBC” appears on the
display.
When disc menu appears on the TV, select an item on the
menu. Playback of the selected item starts.
To locate an item directly
You can select a title/chapter/track directly and start
playback.
• For DVD Video, you can select a title before starting
playback, while you can select a chapter after starting
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
Examples:
playback
.
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10,
then 5.
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
Examples:
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10,
then 5.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
8
9
7
REV. MODE
FM MODE
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
10
10
8
9
7
10
10
To move to the next or previous page of the current
menu:
GROUP/TITLE
To use 3D Phonic
While playing...
3D
Moves to the next page.
PHONIC
ACTION
OFF
DRAMA
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
Moves to the previous page.
THEATER
3D PHONIC
(Canceled)
To return to the previous menu:
• The selected mode can only be shown on the TV.
ACTION
Suitable for action movies and sports
programs.
CANCEL
RETURN
DRAMA
Creates natural and warm sound. Enjoy
movies in a relaxed mood.
THEATER Enjoy sound effects like in a major theater.
(at the same time)
Remote
ONLY
To cancel PBC
To play back using the disc menu
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
7 For DVD Video/DVD Audio:
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
1 Show the disc menu.
MENU
REV. MODE
FM MODE
TOP MENU
SET UP
8
9
7
Select a track.
10
10
Stop playback.
2 Select an item on the disc menu.
Playback starts with the selected track.
ENTER
To reactivate PBC, press 7 (twice if Resume is turned
“ON”), then press DVD/CD 3.
• With some discs, you can also select items by entering the
number using the 10 keys.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments
Adjusting the Volume
Remote control
You can adjust the volume level from level 0 (VOL MIN) to
level 40 (VOL MAX).
Remote control:
Main unit:
VOLUME
VFP
DVD LEVEL
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
CLOCK/
TIMER
VOLUME
SET
Remote
ONLY
,
,
,
To drop the volume in a moment
ENTER
To restore the volume, press again, or
adjust the volume level.
FADE
MUTING
BASS/TREBLE
RHYTHM AX
DISPLAY
DIMMER
SHIFT
VOLUME
+/–
Adjusting the Sound
FADE
To emphasize rhythm feeling—RHYTHM AX
This function emphasizes bass attack feeling, and also
changes the subwoofer level.
MUTING
RHYTHM AX
RHYTHMAX
OFF
(Canceled)
Main unit
To adjust the tone
You can adjust the bass and treble level from –5 to +5.
To adjust the bass
BASS/
TREBLE
TRE
BASS
Canceled
VOLUME
RHYTHM AX
VOLUME +/–
To adjust the treble
BASS/
TREBLE
TRE
BASS
Canceled
VOLUME
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound
Changing the Picture Tone
Remote
ONLY
While showing a playback picture on the TV, you can select
the preset picture tone, or adjust it and store your own taste.
Increase Level
The DVD Video sound is sometimes recorded at a lower
level than for other discs and sources. You can set the
increase level for the currently loaded DVD Video, so you
do not have to adjust the volume every time you change the
source.
To select a preset picture tone
1 While playing, display VFP setting screen.
NORMAL
GAMMA
0
0
0
0
0
0
VFP
BRIGHTNESS
CONTRAST
SATURATION
TINT
DVD LEVEL
6
NORMAL MIDDLE
5
HIGH
SHARPNESS
(at the same time)
On the TV
(at the same time)
2 Select a preset picture tone.
NORMAL Original recording level.
NORMAL
CINEMA
USER1
MIDDLE
HIGH
Output level is increased (less than “HIGH”).
USER2
Output level is increased (more than
“MIDDLE”).
NORMAL
CINEMA
Normally select this.
• Once the current DVD is ejected, this setting is canceled
and set automatically to “NORMAL.”
Suitable for a movie source.
USER1/USER2 You can adjust parameters and can
Remote
ONLY
store the settings (see below).
Changing the Display Brightness
You can dim the display window.
To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.
To adjust the picture tone
DIMMER
DIM2
DIM1
1 Select “USER1” or “USER2.”
AUTO DIM
DIM OFF
(Canceled)
• Follow steps 1 and 2 explained above.
2 Select a parameter you want to adjust.
DIM1
Dims the display.
ENTER
DIM2
Erases the display illumination.
AUTO DIM
Erases the display illumination when
disc playback starts.*
• The display illuminates when
playback stops.
GAMMA
Adjust if the neutral color is bright or
dark (–3 to +3).
* “AUTO DIM” does not work for CD/MP3/WMA.
BRIGHTNESS Adjust if the entire picture is bright
or dark (–8 to +8).
CONTRAST
Adjust if the far and near positions
are unnatural (–7 to +7).
SATURATION Adjust if the picture is whitish or
blackish (–7 to +7).
TINT
Adjust if the human skin color is
unnatural (–7 to +7).
SHARPNESS
Adjust if the picture is indistinct
(–8 to +8).
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Adjust the parameter.
Turning Off the Power
Remote
ONLY
ENTER
Automatically
To turn off the unit after playback is over—Auto
Standby
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 to adjust other parameters.
On
To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.
Canceled
Remote
ONLY
Setting the Clock
(at the same time)
Without setting the built-in clock, you cannot use Daily
Timers, Recording Timer (see page 31) and Sleep Timer.
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL
or CLOCK/TIMER. You can return to the previous step.
When Auto Standby is in use, the A.STANDBY indicator
lights on the display.
When disc play stops, the A.STANDBY indicator starts
flashing. If no operation is done for about 3 minutes while
the indicator is flashing, the System turns off (stands by)
automatically.
1 Activate the clock setting mode.
CLOCK/
TIMER
• Auto Standby does not work while you are listening to
radio (FM/AM) and the external component (AUX).
To turn off the unit after a certain period of time
—Sleep Timer
• If you have already adjusted the clock before, press the
button repeatedly until the clock setting mode is
selected.
1 Specify the time (in minutes).
SLEEP
2 Adjust the hour.
A.STANDBY
SET
10 20 30 60 90 120 150
Canceled
2 Wait until the set time goes off.
3 Adjust the minute.
To check the time remaining until the shut-off time
SET
SLEEP
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
Now the built-in clock starts working.
• If you press the button repeatedly, you can change the shut-
off time.
To check the current clock time during play
DISPLAY
Clock
Source information
• While playing a DVD and MP3/WMA, you cannot check
the current clock time (see page 9) .
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unique DVD/VCD Operations
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the View Angle
Remote control
While playing back a chapter (of DVD Video) containing
multi-view angles, you can view the same scene from
different angles.
• You can also select the multi-view angles using the on-
screen bar (see page 24).
SUB TITLE
ANGLE
AUDIO
ZOOM
While playing...
10 keys
ANGLE
3
,
,
,
ENTER
DVD/CD 3
8
(at the same time)
7
Ex.:
SLOW –/+
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
2
3
SHIFT
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
2
3
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Subtitle Language
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter (of DVD
Video) containing subtitles in different languages, you can
select the subtitle language to display on the TV.
For SVCD: While playing, you can select the subtitles even
if no subtitles are recorded on the disc.
• You can also select the subtitle language using the on-
screen bar (see page 24).
While playing a DVD Video...
1 Display the subtitle selection window.
1/3
ENGLISH
1/3
SUB TITLE
ENGLISH
2
(at the same time)
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select the subtitle language.
While playing a DVD Video...
Ex.:
1/3
2/3
3/3
ENGLISH
FRENCH
JAPANESE
Ex.:
1/3
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
ENGLISH
1/3
2/3
3/3
ENGLISH
FRENCH
JAPANESE
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
While playing a DVD Audio...
Ex.:
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
2
3
While playing an SVCD video...
While playing a Karaoke SVCD or VCD...
SUB TITLE
SVCD
AUDIO
ST1
R2
ST2
L1
2
1
L2
R1
VCD
ST
L
R
(at the same time)
(at the same time)
–/4
OFF
1/4
1
2/4
2
ST1/ST2 To listen to normal stereo (2 channel)
ST
playback.
4/4
3/4
L1/L2/L
To listen to the left audio channel.
4
3
R1/R2/R To listen to the right audio channel.
• SVCD can have 4 audio channels. Karaoke SVCD usually
uses these 4 channels to record two 2-channel recordings
(ST1/ST2).
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Audio Track
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter containing
audio languages, you can select the language to listen to.
For DVD Audio: While playing back a track containing
audio channels, you can select the audio channel to listen to.
For Karaoke SVCD/VCD: When playing back a track, you
can select the audio channel to play.
Remote
ONLY
Playing Back a Bonus Group
Some DVD Audios have a special group called “bonus
group” whose contents are not open to the public.
• To play back a bonus group, you have to enter the specific
“key number” (a kind of password) for the bonus group.
The way of getting the key number depends on the disc.
• You can also select the audio track using the on-screen bar
(see page 24).
1 Select the bonus group.
AUDIO
• The bonus group is usually recorded as the last group
(for example, if a disc contains 4 groups including a
bonus group, “group 4” is the bonus group).
• For how to select the group, see “To select a title/group”
on page 13.
1
(at the same time)
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Enter the key number.
2 Select slow motion speed.
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
+
SLOW
SLOW
–
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ENTER
Forward slow motion starts.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
Reverse slow motion* starts.
+
SLOW
SLOW
1/32
1/32
1/16
1/16
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
1/2
3
Follow the interactive instructions shown on the
screen.
–
To cancel the key number entry, press 7.
*Not available for SVCD/VCD.
Remote
ONLY
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
Special Effect Playback
Still picture playback
To replay the previous scenes
(One-Touch Replay)
To start still picture play- To resume normal
back:
• This function is only used while playing DVD Video.
While playing back...
playback:
While playing...
The playback position moves
back about 10 seconds before the
current position (only within the
same title).
DVD/CD
Frame-by-frame playback
Remote
ONLY
Zoom
1 While playing...
1 While playing back...
Still picture playback starts.
ZOOM
4
2 Advance the still picture frame by frame.
(at the same time)
ZOOM
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
ZOOM 1
ZOOM 2
ZOOM 3
ZOOM 4
ZOOM 5
4
ZOOM OFF
ZOOM 6
Slow-motion playback
1 While playing...
2 Move the zoomed-in position.
Still picture playback starts.
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding
SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Disc Operations
Programming the Playing Order—
Remote control
Remote
ONLY
Program Play
You can arrange the playing order of the chapters or tracks
(up to 99) before you start playback.
1 Before starting playback, activate Program Play.
PLAY
10 keys
MODE
PROGRAM
RANDOM
Canceled
ENTER
,
CANCEL
7
DVD/CD 3
PRGM
8
PLAY
On the display
MODE
4
/
¢
REPEAT
REPEAT A-B
PROGRAM
No Group/Title
1
2
3
Track/Chapter
SHIFT
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
USE NUMERIC KEYS TO PROGRAM TRACKS.
USE CANCEL TO DELETE THE PROGRAM.
On the TV
2 Select chapters or tracks you want for Program Play.
• For DVD/MP3/WMA:
Main unit
1 Select a title or group number.
2 Select a chapter or track number.
3 Repeat the above steps 1 and 2.
• For SVCD/VCD/CD:
1 Select tracks.
To enter the numbers directly:
Examples:
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
To enter number 5, press 5.
To enter number 15, press +10,
then 5.
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
To enter number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
9
7
10
10
DVD/CD 3
, 7,
4
¢
0
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
3 Start playback.
Playing at Random—Random Play
You can play all chapters or tracks at random.
• Random Play cannot be used for some DVDs.
Playback starts in the order you
have programmed.
DVD/CD
1 Before starting playback, activate Random Play.
PLAY
MODE
To skip a step:
To pause:
To stop:
PROGRAM
RANDOM
GROUP/TITLE
Canceled
To release, press
DVD/CD 3.
RANDOM
To check the programmed contents
Before or after playback...
2 Start playback.
In the reverse order.
Playback starts in random order.
Random Play ends when the
entire disc has been played.
DVD/CD
In the programmed order.
To skip a chapter/
track:
To pause:
To stop:
• You can also use 4 or ¢ to check the programmed
contents.
To modify the program
Before or after playback...
To release, press
DVD/CD 3.
To erase the last step:
To erase the entire
program:
CANCEL
RETURN
To exit from Random Play
Before or after playback...
PLAY
MODE
PROGRAM
RANDOM
To add steps in the program:
Repeat step 2.
Canceled
To exit from Program Play
Before or after playback...
PLAY
MODE
PROGRAM
RANDOM
Canceled
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
A-B Repeat
Playing Repeatedly
You can repeat playback of a desired portion by specifying
the beginning (point A) and the ending (point B).
• A-B Repeat cannot be used for MP3/WMA and for some
DVDs.
• You can also select the repeat mode using the on-screen
bar (see page 25).
• A-B Repeat can be used within the same title while playing
a DVD Video, and within the same track for the other
discs.
Repeat Play
You can repeat playback.
• For DVD Video:
While playing...
1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), select
REPEAT A-B
the start point (A).
*
REPEAT
REP CHAP
REP TTL
starts flashing on the
REP OFF
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
display.
(Canceled)
A-
•
appears on the TV
if the TV is turned on.
• For DVD Audio:
While playing or before playback...
(at the same time)
REPEAT A-B
*
REPEAT
REP TRK
REP GRP
2 Select the end point (B).
REP OFF
(Canceled)
stops flashing.
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
A-B
•
appears on the
• For MP3/WMA:
While playing or before playback...
TV.
REPEAT A-B
• You can search for the end
point using the ¡ button.
REPEAT
*
REP TRK
REP GRP
REP ALL
(at the same time)
REP OFF
(Canceled)
To cancel A-B Repeat, press REPEAT A-B again while
holding SHIFT.
• For CD/SVCD/VCD:
While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD) or before
playback...
• A-B Repeat will also be canceled when you stop play or
skip the chapter or track.
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
*
REP ALL
REP TRK
Main Unit
ONLY
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock
REP OFF
(Canceled)
You can lock the disc tray so that no one can eject the loaded
disc.
• This is possible while the System is on standby.
REP CHAP* Repeats the current chapter.
REP TTL Repeats the current title.
REP TRK* Repeats the current track.
REP GRP Repeats the current group.
REP ALL Repeats the disc or program.
While the disc tray is closed...
*During Program Play and Random Play, “REP STEP”
appears instead of these indications, and repeat modes
change as follows for all the discs.
(at the same time)
REP STEP
REP ALL
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.
“UNLOCKED” appears on the display.
REP OFF
(Canceled)
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On-Screen Disc Operations
On-screen Bar Information
Remote control
You can check the disc information (except for MP3/WMA/
JPEG disc) and use some functions through the on-screen
bar.
ZOOM
10 keys
1 Disc type
2 Playback information
Indication
Mbps
Meanings
Current transfer rate
(Megabits per second)
ENTER
,
,
,
ON SCREEN
CANCEL
TITLE
CHAP
2
3
DVD/CD 3
8
Current title
7
REPEAT
¡
Current chapter
Current group
Current track
Time indications
4
/
¢
GROUP
1
TRACK 14
TOTAL1:25:58
SHIFT
3 Operation modes
Indication
Meanings
Playback
/
/
Forward/Reverse search
Forward/Reverse slow-motion
On-screen bars
DVD Video
Pause
Stop
1
2
3
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
4 Function icons (on the pull-down menu)
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
TRACK
1
/3/1
1/
3
1
Indication
Meanings
TIME
Select to change the time indication.
4
DVD Audio
OFF
Select to repeat playback.
Select for time search.
Select for chapter search.
Select for track search.
1
2
3
3
3
3
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
DVD-AUDIO
CHAP.
TIME
OFF
1/
3
1/
3
PAGE
TRACK
4
SVCD
Select to change the audio language or
channel (see also page 19).
1/3
1/3
1
2
Select to change subtitle language
(see also page 18).
TRACK
3
TIME
00:58
SVCD
TIME
O
F
F
S
T
1
-/
4
Select to change the view angle (see
also page 18).
1/3
4
4
VCD
1
2
Select to change the page.
PAGE 1 / 5
TRACK
3
TIME
00:58
VCD
TIME
O
F
F
S
T
CD
1
2
TRACK
3
TIME
00:58
CD
TIME
O
F
F
4
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Operations Using the On-screen Bar
For detailed operations of the following functions, see
also “Operations Using the On-screen Bar” on the left.
Ex.: Selecting a subtitle (French) for DVD Video
While a disc is selected as the source...
To change the time information
You can change the time information in the on-screen bar
and the display window on the main unit.
1 Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
ON SCREEN
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pull-
down menu.
8.5Mbps
TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TIME 0:00:58
DVD-VIDEO
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
DVD-VIDEO
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3
1
/
3
1
/1
TIME
2 Make sure
is selected (highlighted).
Goes off
3 Change the time indication.
2 Select (highlight) the item you want.
ENTER
REM 0:11:23
TOTAL 1:01:58
TIME 0:00:58
T.REM 0:35:24
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
REM
Elapsed playing time of the current
chapter/track.
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
3 Display the pop-up window.
Remaining time of the current chapter/
track.
ENTER
T
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
3
TIME 0:00:58
TOTAL
T.REM
Elapsed disc time.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
Remaining disc time.
ENGLISH
To erase the on-screen bar
4 Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
ON SCREEN
T
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
3
TIME 0:00:58
1
/3/1
2
/
3
1
FRENCH
Repeat Play
• See also page 23.
5 Finish the setting.
1 While playing a disc (without PBC for SVCD/VCD),
display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD Video: Repeat Play can be selected
before starting playback.
Pop-up window goes off.
ENTER
2 Select
.
OFF
3 Display the pop-up window.
To erase the on-screen bar
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
ON SCREEN
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
OFF
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Select the repeat mode you want.
Time Search
You can move to a particular point by specifying the elapsed
playing time from the beginning.
A-B
Repeats a desired portion (see below).
TITLE
GROUP
ALL
Repeats the current title.
Repeats the current group.
1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display
the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD: Time Search can be used before
starting playback.
Repeats the disc (except for DVD) or
program.
CHAPTER
TRACK*
OFF
*
Repeats the current chapter.
Repeats the current track.
Cancels Repeat Play.
2 Select
.
3 Display the pop-up window.
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
*During Program Play and Random Play, “STEP”
appears.
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
TIME _ : _ _ : _ _
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
5 Finish the setting.
4 Enter the time.
You can specify the time in hours/minutes/seconds.
ENTER
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
Examples:
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
To move to a point of 1
(hours): 02 (minutes): 00
(seconds), press 1, 0, 2, 0, then
0.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
A-B Repeat
• See also page 23.
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
To move to a point of 54
(minutes): 00 (seconds), press
0, 5, 4, 0, then 0.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pull-
down menu.
2 Select
.
OFF
• It is always required to enter the hour digit (even “0”
hour), but it is not required to enter trailing zeros (the
last two digits in the examples above).
3 Display the pop-up window.
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
• To correct a misentry, press Cursor
entry.
<
to erase the last
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
OFF
5 Finish the setting.
4 Select “A-B.”
The System starts playing the disc
from the selected playing time.
ENTER
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
1/3/1
1/
3
1
A–B
5 Select the start point (A).
Chapter/Track Search
You can search for the chapter (DVD Video) or track (DVD
Audio) number to play.
ENTER
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
C
H
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
A-
CHAP.
1
/3
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pull-
down menu.
6 Select the end point (B).
CHAP.
TRACK
2 Select
or
.
A-B Repeat starts. The selected
portion plays repeatedly.
• Before pressing ENTER, you can
search for the end point using the
¡ button.
ENTER
3 Display the pop-up window.
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
CHAPTER
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
_
To cancel A-B Repeat, repeat steps 1 to 3, and select “OFF”
in step 4.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
4 Enter the desired chapter/track number.
Operations on the CONTROL Screen
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
Examples:
To select chapter/track 5, press
5.
To select chapter/track 15,
press 1, then 5.
The CONTROL screen automatically appears on the TV
when you load an MP3, WMA, or JPEG disc.
You can search for and play the desired tracks through the
CONTROL screen.
• If both types of files (MP3/WMA files and JPEG files) are
recorded on a disc, select the file type to play (see page 35).
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
To select chapter/track 30,
press 3, then 0.
CONTROL screen
Ex.: When the MP3 disc is loaded.
6
• To correct a misentry, press the 10 keys until the
desired number shown in the pop-up window.
7
8
5 Finish the setting.
REPEAT TRACK Time : 00:00:14
1
The System starts playing the
Group : 2 / 3
Track : 5 / 14 (Total 41)
ENTER
9
searched chapter or track.
Spring
Summer
Fall
Cloudy.mp3
Fair.mp3
Fog.mp3
Hail.mp3
Indian summer.mp3
Rain.mp3
Shower.mp3
Snow.mp3
Thunder.mp3
Typhoon.mp3
Wind.mp3
2
3
Winter
Track Information
0
-
Title
Rain
Artist
Remote
4
5
ONLY
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures
Album
Winter sky.mp3
While playing back a track (of DVD Audio) linked to
browsable still pictures (BSP), you can select the still picture
(turn the page) to be shown on the TV.
• If a track is linked to browsable still pictures (BSP), they
are usually shown in turn automatically during playback.
1 Current group number/total group number
2 Current group (in blue)
3 Group list
4 Track information (ID3 Tag Version 1.0: only for
MP3/WMA)
5 Current track (in blue)
6 Repeat Play setting
7 Elapsed playing time of the current track
(only for MP3/WMA)
1 While playing a DVD Audio, display the on-screen
bar with the pull-down menu.
2 Select
.
PAGE 1 / 5
3 Display the pop-up window.
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
1/ 1/
DVD-AUDIO
TIME
8 Operation mode icon
OFF
3
5
TRACK
PAGE
9 Current track number/total number of tracks in the
current group (total number of tracks on the loaded
disc)
0 Highlight (green) bar
- Track list
1
4 Select a still picture you want.
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
1/ 3/
DVD-AUDIO
TIME
OFF
3
5
TRACK
PAGE
3
5 Finish the setting.
ENTER
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To move the highlight (green) bar between group list and
track list:
To repeat slide-show for JPEG
While playing or before starting playback...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
Moves the bar to the track
list.
REP GRP
REP ALL
REP OFF
(Canceled)
Moves the bar to the group
list.
REP GRP Repeats the current group.
REP ALL Repeats the disc.
To select a group/track in the list:
Move the highlight bar to a desired
item.
• For Repeat Play of MP3/WMA, see page 23.
• If you move the highlight bar
while playing back an MP3/
WMA disc, the selected track
starts playback automatically.
To zoom in the still picture
• You cannot zoom in the still picture during slide-show.
1 While playing back a still picture...
• During slide-show, press 8 to display the still picture,
then...
To start playback
For MP3/WMA:
ZOOM
4
Playback starts with the selected
track.
ENTER
• Pressing DVD/CD 3 also starts
playback.
(at the same time)
ZOOM
For JPEG:
ZOOM 1
ZOOM 2
4
The selected track (still picture)
is displayed until you change it.
ZOOM OFF
ENTER
2 Move the zoomed-in position.
Slide-show playback starts.
Each track (still picture) is
shown on the screen for about 3
seconds, then changes one after
another.
DVD/CD
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding
• Once you start playing back a JPEG track, the CONTROL
SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.
screen goes off.
• To cancel slide-show, and display the current still picture,
press 8.
To skip a track:
To stop playback:
GROUP/TITLE
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Tape Operations
IMPORTANT
It may be unlawful to record or play back copyrighted
Remote control
material without the consent of the copyright owner.
Recording on a Tape
You can use type I tapes for recording.
• To play a tape, see page 12.
REV. MODE
1 Insert a recordable cassette.
Push
Insert
Close
TAPE 2 3
FM/AM
AUX
DVD/CD
3
7
With the tape side facing outside
2 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
SHIFT
settings on the display.
Reverse mode indicator
Tape direction indicator
Current source
Main unit
To change the direction
3 (forward)
2 (reverse)
PUSH OPEN 0
To change the Reverse mode if necessary
REV. MODE
7
(at the same time)
TAPE 2 3
FM/AM
AUX
To record on both sides.
• When using Reverse Mode, start
DVD/CD
3
(
)
recording in the forward (3) direction.
REC
7
To record on only one side.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Select and start playing the source—“FM,” “AM,”
“DVD/CD,” or “AUX.”
To record Program Play or Random Play
1 Select Program Play (and make a program) or Random
Play, but do not start playback.
• When recording a disc, you can also use “Synchronized
Disc Recording” (see below).
2 Press REC to start recording.
• When disc play stops, recording continues. It is
required that recording be stopped manually.
4 Start recording.
REC
To record only your favorite track
You can specify tracks to be recorded on the tape while
listening to a disc (except for DVD Video).
On the main unit
1 Start playing a disc.
To stop recording:
DVD/CD
2 While a track you want to record on the tape is
playing...
Synchronized Disc Recording
You can start and stop both disc play and tape recording at
the same time.
The disc player returns to the
REC
beginning of that track and the
track is recorded on the tape.
After recording the track, the
disc player and cassette deck
To record the entire disc
On the main unit
automatically stop.
1 Load a disc and insert a recordable cassette.
• If the current playing source is not the disc player, press
DVD/CD 3, then 7.
3 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to record other tracks you want.
• You can exchange the discs if necessary.
2 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
settings on the display.
To protect your recording
Cassettes have two small tabs on the back to protect
from unexpected erasure or re-recording.
To protect your recording, remove these tabs.
• See step 2 of “Recording on a Tape” on page 29.
3 Start recording.
The System automatically
REC
creates 4-second blanks between
the tunes recorded on the tapes.
On the main unit
To re-record on a protected tape, cover the holes with
adhesive tape.
• When either disc play* or recording ends, both disc player
and the cassette deck stop at the same time.
• If you press REC soon after the recording is stopped, “NO
REC” may appear.
* For DVD Video: When a title is finished playing.
To record a “Live” disc
It will not be desirable to put 4-second blank portions
between the tunes recorded on the tape.
To record the entire disc without any interruption
recorded, pause the disc play (press DVD/CD 3, then 8)
before pressing REC.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer Operations
Remote
ONLY
Setting the Timer
Remote control
Using Daily Timer, you can wake up with your favorite
song. On the other hand, with Recording Timer, you can
make a tape of a radio broadcast automatically.
• You can store three Daily Timer settings and one
Recording Timer setting; however, you can activate only
one of Daily Timers and Recording Timer at the same time.
• To exit from the timer setting, press CLOCK/TIMER as
required.
STANDBY/ON
CLOCK/
TIMER
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL.
You can return to the previous step.
SET
,
1 Select one of the timer setting modes you want to set—
Daily 1 ON time, Daily 2 ON time, Daily 3 ON time, or
Recording Timer ON time.
CANCEL
Daily 1 Timer
Daily 2 Timer
Daily 3 Timer
CLOCK/
TIMER
DAILY 1*
ON (Time)
DAILY 2
*
ON (Time)
DAILY 3
*
ON (Time)
ON (Time)
Canceled
Clock setting
REC TMR
(see page 17)
Recording Timer
1
Ex. When Daily Timer 1 setting mode is selected
2 Make the timer setting as you want.
Repeat the following operations until you finish setting in
the following order—
SET
For Daily Timers:
1
2
3
Set the hour then the minute for on-time.
Set the hour then the minute for off-time.
Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”
“TUNER AM,” “TAPE,” “DISC,” or “AUX.”
1
* Daily Timer initial settings when shipped from the
factory
4
For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a
preset channel.
• DAILY 1:ON Time (6:00)/OFF Time (8:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
• DAILY 2:ON Time (12:00)/OFF Time (14:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
• DAILY 3:ON Time (18:00)/OFF Time (20:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
For “DISC”: Select the title/group number, then
the chapter/track number.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Select the volume level.
•You can select the volume level (“VOL 0” to
“VOL 50” and “VOL – –”).
If you select “VOL – –,” the volume is set to the last
level when the unit has been turned off.
How Recording Timer actually works
When Recording Timer has been set, Timer (
indicator and the REC indicator are lit on the display.
Recording Timer works only once.
)
Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information
appears in sequence.
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station or
changes the source to “AUX”, sets the volume level to the
preset level, and starts recording.
For Recording Timer:
1
2
3
Set the hour then the minute for on-time.
Set the hour then the minute for off-time.
Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”
“TUNER AM,” or “AUX.”
When the off-time comes
The System stops recording, and turns off (stands by).
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change
it.
4
For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a
preset channel.
Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information
appears in sequence.
To turn off the Timer after its setting is done
Since Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday,
you may need to cancel it on some particular days.
• Recording Timer can also be canceled temporarily.
3 Turn off the unit (on standby) if you have set the timer
with the System turned on.
STANDBY/ON
1 Select the Timer you want to cancel.
Daily 1 Timer
Daily 2 Timer
Daily 3 Timer
CLOCK/
TIMER
DAILY 1*
ON (Time)
DAILY 2
*
ON (Time)
DAILY 3
*
ON (Time)
ON (Time)
Canceled
Clock setting
REC TMR
(see page 17)
Recording Timer
How Daily Timer actually works
1
Ex.To cancel Daily
Timer 1
Once the Daily Timer has been set, the timer (
)
indicator and timer number indicator (1/2/3) are lit on the
display. Daily Timer is activated at the same time
everyday until the timer is turned off manually (see the
next column) or another timer is activated.
2 Turn off the selected Timer.
To turn on the Timer
CANCEL
RETURN
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, starts playing the specified source
(except “AUX”), and sets the volume level to the preset
level.
• While Daily Timer is working, the timer (
and timer number indicator (1/2/3) flash on the display.
1 Select the Timer (DAILY 1/2/3, and REC TMR) you
want to activate.
) indicator
Daily 1 Timer
Daily 2 Timer
Daily 3 Timer
CLOCK/
TIMER
When the off-time comes
The System stops playback, and turns off (stands by)
automatically.
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change
DAILY 1
ON (Time)
DAILY 2
ON (Time)
DAILY 3
ON (Time)
REC TMR
ON (Time)
Canceled
Clock setting
(see page 17)
Recording Timer
it.
2 Activate the selected Timer.
SET
1
Ex. When Daily Timer 1 (DAILY 1) is
activated
3 Wait until the indication goes off.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Menu Operations
.
Remote
ONLY
Operating Procedure
Remote control
You can use the Setup Menus only when a disc is selected
as the source and its playback is not yet started.
Ex.: Selecting “STILL PICTURE” for “FILE TYPE”:
1 Display the Setup Menu.
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
MENU
SET UP
10 keys
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
SET UP
ENTER
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
,
,
,
(at the same time)
2 Select one of the Setup Menus.
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
AUDIO
SHIFT
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
3 Select the item you want to adjust.
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
Setup Menu Icons
AUDIO
The icon for the selected Setup Menu will be
highlighted.
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
4 Display the pop-up window.
Ex.: LANGUAGE Setup Menu is selected.
PICTURE
ENTER
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
1
2
3
4
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
AUDIO
AUDIO
STILL PICTURE
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT . USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
5 Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
AUDIO
AUDIO
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
STILL PICTURE
SELECT
ENTER
USE USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO SELECT
.
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
1 LANGUAGE Setup Menu
2 PICTURE Setup Menu
3 AUDIO Setup Menu
4 OTHERS Setup Menu
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Finish the setting.
SUBTITLE
ENTER
Some discs have multiple subtitle languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43) or “OFF (no subtitle).”
7 Repeat steps 3 to 4 to set other items on the same
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
Setup Menu.
Select one of the languages shown on the TV from—
ENGLISH, SPANISH and CHINESE.
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set other items on another Setup
Menu.
To exit from the Setup Menu
PICTURE Setup Menu
You can select the desired options concerning a picture or
monitor screen.
MENU
SET UP
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
(at the same time)
AUDIO
LANGUAGE Setup Menu
You can select the initial languages for disc playback. You
can also select the language shown on the TV screen while
operating this System.
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
MONITOR TYPE
LANGUAGE
Select the monitor type of your TV to play DVD Video
recorded with aspect ratio of 16:9.
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
For the multi-color system TV
When you use a multi-color system TV, you can change the
color system of the System automatically by selecting
“MULTI” options for the monitor type. In this case, the color
system of the System is changed to match to that of the
loaded disc regardless of the VIDEO OUT SELECT setting
(see page 6).
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
MENU LANGUAGE
Some discs have multiple menu languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43).
Select one of the following:
16:9 / 16:9 MULTI
:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 16:9 (wide
TV).
AUDIO LANGUAGE
4:3 LB (Letter Box) / 4:3 MULTI LB:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3
(conventional TV). While viewing a wide screen
picture, the black bars appear on the top and the bottom
of the screen.
Some discs have multiple audio languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43).
4:3 PS (Pan Scan) / 4:3 MULTI PS:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3. While
viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not
appear; however, the left and right edges of the pictures
will not be shown on the screen.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO Setup Menu
You can adjust the sound settings of the System.
AUDIO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
DOWN MIX
STREAM/PCM
DOLBY SURROUND
AUTO
Ex.: 16:9
Ex.: 4:3 LB
Ex: 4:3 PS
D. RANGE COMPRESSION
PICTURE SOURCE
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting an
appropriate option—picture source type (either video source
or film source).
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
When using the digital output terminal on the rear, set this
correctly according to the connected component.
Select one of the following:
AUTO: Normally select this.
When playing back a disc containing both video
and film sources, the System automatically
changes the processing to match it to the picture
type (film or video source) of the current chapter.
Select one of the following:
PCM ONLY:
To connect to a linear PCM digital
equipment such as an MD recorder.
FILM: To play a film source disc.
VIDEO: To play a video source disc.
DOLBYDIGITAL To connect to a Dolby Digital decoder
/PCM:
or an amplifier with a built-in Dolby
Digital decoder.
STREAM/PCM: To connect to a DTS decoder or an
amplifier with a built-in DTS decoder.
SCREEN SAVER
You can activate or deactivate screen saver while operating
the built-in disc player.
• See also “DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals” on
page 45.
Select one of the following:
ON:
The pictures on the TV becomes dark when no
operation is done for about 5 minutes.
DOWN MIX
When playing a multi-channel DVD, the System converts
the signals into 2 channels.
OFF:
To cancel the screen saver.
Downmix setting is effective for the speaker output (and
digital audio output if “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” is set
to “PCM ONLY”) from this System.
FILE TYPE
If both audio tracks (MP3 or WMA files) and still picture
(JPEG files) are recorded on a disc, you can select which to
play.
Select one of the following:
DOLBY
SURROUND: Pro Logic decoder.
STEREO: To connect a conventional stereo
amplifier, receiver, MD player, TV, etc.
To connect an amplifier with the Dolby
Select one of the following:
AUDIO:
To play MP3/WMA files.
STILL PICTURE: To play JPEG files.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. RANGE COMPRESSION
ON SCREEN GUIDE
You can activate or deactivate the on-screen guide icons (see
page 13).
• When recording the picture on a VCR, select “OFF” to
avoid recording the guide icons on your video tape.
You can compress the dynamic range (the difference
between the loudest sound and the softest sound) to enjoy a
powerful sound even at a low volume level when listening to
Dolby Digital software. This is useful at night.
• The effectiveness varies depends on software.
Select one of the following:
Select one of the following:
ON:
To activate the on-screen guide icons.
To cancel the on-screen guide icons.
AUTO: To enjoy powerful sounds with full dynamic
OFF:
range.
ON:
Best for watching a movie at a low volume level.
AV COMPULINK MODE
When connecting the System to a JVC’s TV with the AV
COMPU LINK remote control system, select the proper
setting.
OTHERS Setup Menu
You can change some other convenient functions.
Select one of the following:
DVD1: To connect to the VIDEO-3 Input jacks on the
OTHERS
TV.
RESUME
ON
ON
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
DVD2: To connect to the VIDEO-1 Input jacks on the
DVD1
TV.
DVD3: To connect to the VIDEO-2 Input jacks on the
TV.
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control
system” on page 6.
RESUME
PARENTAL LOCK
You can activate or deactivate Resume for disc playback
Select this to enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
See the section that follows.
(see page 13).
Select one of the following:
ON:
To activate Resume.
To cancel Resume.
OFF:
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Select “COUNTRY CODE,” then display the pop-up
Restricting the Review
window.
Remote
ONLY
—Parental Lock
PARENTAL LOCK
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
G
MX
MY
O
MZ
ENTER
_
You can restrict playback of DVD Video containing violent
scenes and those unsuitable for your family members. Once
you have set the rating level, such violent scenes (for which
a higher level than you set is assigned) may be skipped or
changed to another scene (depending on how the disc is
programmed).
NA
NC
NE
NF
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
6 Select the country code of your area.
• See “Country/Area Codes List” on page 44 to find your
country code.
To set Parental Lock
Set the rating level—Level 1 (most restrictive) to Level 8
(least restrictive).
ENTER
1 Display the Setup Menu.
LANGUAGE
MENU
SET UP
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
The System automatically enters “SET LEVEL” mode.
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
7 Make sure “SET LEVEL” is selected, then display the
SELECT
USE
pop-up window.
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
ENTER
ENTER
PARENTAL LOCK
(at the same time)
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
M
NONE
8
N
7
6
_
5
4
3
2 Select the OTHERS Setup Menus.
OTHERS
RESUME
ON
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
ON
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
DVD1
8 Set the rating level (NONE, 8 – 1).
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
ENTER
3 Select “PARENTAL LOCK.”
OTHERS
RESUME
ON
ON
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
DVD1
The System automatically enters “PASSWORD” entry
mode.
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
9 Make sure “PASSWORD” is selected, then enter any
4-digit number for your password.
4 Enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
ENTER
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
PARENTAL LOCK
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
MY
ENTER
NONE
_
_
_
_
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
10 Finish the setting.
ENTER
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the setting
To release Parental Lock temporarily
When you set a strict rating level, some discs may not be
played back at all. When you try to play such a disc, the
following screen appears on the TV.
1 Display the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
• Follow steps 1 to 4 of “To set Parental Lock.”
PARENTAL LOCK
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
MY
4
PARENTAL LOCK
TEMPORARY RELEASE
NOT RELEASE
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
PASSWORD
SELECT
ENTER
PASSWORD? ••• PRESS
0
~
9
KEYS
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
“PASSWORD” is automatically selected.
• You cannot select any item other than “EXIT” until you
enter the correct password.
SELECT
ENTER
USE 5∞ TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM.
2 Enter your password.
1 Select “TEMPORARY RELEASE,” then ENTER.
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
“PASSWORD” is
ENTER
automatically selected.
ENTER
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
• If you enter a wrong password, “– – – –” appears again.
If you missed three times, “EXIT” is automatically
selected. In this case, press ENTER to exit from the
PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
• If you do not play back such a disc, select “NOT
RELEASE,” then ENTER. Then eject the disc.
2 Enter your password.
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
• If you forget your password, enter “8888.”
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
3 Change the settings.
ENTER
• Follow steps 5 to 8 of “To set Parental Lock.”
4 Enter your password again (after selecting
REV. MODE
FM MODE
“PASSWORD” manually if necessary).
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ENTER
• If you enter a wrong password three times, “NOT
RELEASE” is automatically selected. In this case, press
ENTER. Then eject the disc.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
• If you want to change a password, enter a new four digit
number in this step.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Information
• When using an 8 cm disc, place it on the inner circle of the disc
tray.
Learning More about This System
•
On some DVD, SVCD, or VCD discs, the actual operations
may be different from what is explained in this manual, due to
the programming and disc structure; such differences are not a
malfunction of this System.
Getting Started (see pages 3 to 6)
Changing the Scanning Mode
• To enjoy the progressive video picture, connect a TV with the
progressive video input using component video cord.
• Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When
you play back such a disc, “LR ONLY” appears on the display
and the System plays back the left front and right front signals.
• 3D Phonic setting is also applied to the optical digital output
signals through the DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal.
• When using Resume on SVCD or VCD with PBC, the
playback might start on a position slightly different from
where you have stopped.
Before Operating the System (see pages 7 to 9)
Playable Disc Types:
• If you play back an NTSC disc with this setting set to “PAL,”
you can watch the playback pictures (the disc will be
reproduced using “PAL 60” format), but the TV screen may
roll over upward and downward rapidly.
• If you play back a PAL disc with this setting set to “NTSC,”
you can watch the playback pictures, but the following
symptoms may occur:
• You can use Resume only for the DVD/SVCD/VCD except
for some discs—depending how the disc is programmed.
– The items on the disc menu will be blurred, and be shown
slightly shifted when highlighted.
– The aspect ratio of the picture may differ from the original
aspect ratio.
Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments
(see pages 15 to 17)
Adjusting the Volume:
• Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting
the headphones.
– The picture movement is not smooth.
Daily Operations—Playback (see pages 10 to 14)
Listening to the Radio:
Adjusting the Sound:
• This function also affects the sound through the headphones.
• If you store a new station into an occupied preset number, the
previously stored station in that number will be erased.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the preset stations will be erased in a few days. If this
happens, preset the stations again.
Setting the Clock:
• “0:00” will flash on the display until you set the clock.
• The clock may gain or lose 1 to 2 minutes per month. If this
happens, reset the clock.
Unique DVD/VCD Operations (see pages 18 to 20)
Playing Back a Tape:
• During slow-motion playback, no sound will be reproduced.
• While zoomed in, the picture may look coarse.
• It is not recommended to use the C-120 or longer tapes. These
tapes easily jams in the pinch rollers and the capstans, and may
cause characteristic deterioration.
Advanced Disc Operations (see pages 21 to 23)
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play:
• If you try to program a 100th track, “MEM FULL” appears on
the display.
Playing Back a Disc:
• For MP3/WMA playback...
– This System cannot play “packet write” discs.
– MP3/WMA discs are required a longer readout time than
regular CDs. (It depends on the complexity of the group/file
configuration.)
– Some MP3/WMA files cannot be played back and will be
skipped. This result from their recording processes and
conditions.
• While programming steps...
Your entry will be ignored if you have tried to program an item
number that does not exist on the disc (for example, selecting
track 14 on a disc that only has 12 tracks).
Playing at Random—Random Play:
– When making MP3/WMA discs, use ISO 9660 Level 1 or
Level 2 for the disc format.
– This System can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the letter
case—upper/lower).
• The 4 button does not work for skipping chapters or tracks,
but only work for going back to the beginning of the current
chapter or track.
– It is recommended that you make each MP3 file at a
sampling rate of 44.1 kHz and at bit rate of 128 kbps. This
System cannot play back files made at bit rate of less than 64
kbps.
– This System can recognize the total of 1000 tracks and of 99
groups (each group can contain up to 150 tracks). Those
exceeding the maximum number cannot be recognized.
– Playback order of MP3/WMA tracks may be different from
the one you have intended while recording (see page 40). If
a folder does not include MP3/WMA tracks, they are
ignored.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On-Screen Disc Operations (see pages 24 to 28)
• For JPEG files playback...
– It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480
resolution. (If a file has been recorded at a resolution of
more than 640 x 480, it will take a long time to be shown.)
– This System can play only baseline JPEG files. Progressive
JPEG files or lossless JPEG files cannot be played.
Timer Operations (see pages 31 to 32)
• When using an external component—“AUX” for the playback
source, set the timer built in the component at the same time.
• Before turning off the power, do not forget to prepare the
required materials—a disc or tape for playback and a
recordable tape for recording.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the timer will be canceled. You need to set the clock
first, then the timer again.
• Without stopping the recording, you cannot change the source
after Recording Timer start recording.
• If you set the Sleep Timer after Daily Timer starts playing the
selected source, Daily Timer is canceled.
• If you set the Sleep Timer after Recording Timer starts
recording, Recording Timer is canceled, but recording
continues until Sleep Timer shuts off the power.
Baseline JPEG format:
Used for digital cameras, web,
etc.
Progressive JPEG format: Used for web.
Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely used
now.
– This System may not play back JPEG files properly which
are recorded by the devices other than digital still camera.
– If progressive or lossless JPEG files are played back, a black
screen appears. In this case, stop playback and select a
baseline JPEG file. Note that it may take a long time to
select another file.
Setup Menu Operations (see pages 33 to 38)
LANGUAGE:
Advanced Tape Operations (see pages 29 to 30)
Recording on a Tape:
• The recording level is automatically set correctly. Thus, you
can adjust the sound you are actually listening to without
affecting the recording level.
• When the language you have selected for “MENU
LANGUAGE,” “AUDIO LANGUAGE,” or “SUBTITLE” is
not recorded on a disc, the original language is used as the
initial language.
PICTURE—MONITOR TYPE:
• There is leader tape which cannot be recorded onto at the start
and end of cassette tapes. Thus, when recording CDs or radio
broadcasts, wind the leader tape first to ensure that the
recording will be made without any music part lost.
• If you start recording with no cassette inserted, “NO TAPE”
appears on the display. If a protected tape has been inserted,
“NO REC” appears.
• When using Reverse Mode for recording, start recording in the
forward (3) direction first; otherwise, recording will stop
when only one side (reverse) of the tape is recorded.
• Even if “4:3 PS” is selected, the screen size may become 4:3
letter box with some DVD Video discs. This depends on how
the discs are recorded.
• When you select “16:9” for a picture whose aspect ratio is 4:3,
the picture slightly changes due to the process for converting
the picture width.
AUDIO—DOWN MIX:
• This setting is not effective when DTS multi-channel software
is played back.
OTHERS—ON SCREEN GUIDE:
• You can also change Reverse Mode setting (
after starting recording.
and
)
• Setup Menus and on-screen bar will be displayed (and
recorded) even though this function is set to “OFF.”
Subtitles and the information for zooming in always appear on
the display regardless of this setting.
• You cannot open or close the disc tray while recording.
Synchronized Disc Recording:
• When the tape reaches its end in the forward direction (3)
during recording with Reverse Mode set to
, the last tune
will be re-recorded at the beginning of the reverse side.
MP3/WMA/JPEG groups/tracks configuration
This System plays back the tracks as follows.
Hierarchy
Level 1
ROOT
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
9
01
03
04
10
3
7
02
4
5
6
8
11
12
05
1
2
Group with its play order
Track with its play order
01
1
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the System
Maintenance
To get the best performance of the System, keep your discs,
tapes, and mechanism clean.
• Stains should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the System is
heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-diluted
neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean with a dry
cloth.
• Since the System may deteriorate in quality, become damaged
or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the following:
– DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.
Handling discs
– DO NOT wipe it strongly.
• When removing the disc from its case, hold it at the edge while
pressing the center hole lightly.
– DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.
– DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as insecticides
to it.
• DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact for
a long time.
• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc.
• Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping.
• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc.
• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, temperature extremes, and
moisture.
To clean the disc:
Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to
edge.
Handling cassette tapes
• If the tape is loose in its cassette, take up the slack by inserting
a pencil in one of the reels and rotate it.
– If the tape is loose, it may get stretched, cut, or caught in the
cassette.
• Be careful not to touch the tape surface.
• Avoid the following places to store the tape—in dusty places,
in direct sunlight or heat, in moist areas, on a TV or speaker,
or near a magnet.
To keep the best recording and playback sound quality
• Use a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to clean the heads,
capstans, and pinch rollers.
• Use a head demagnetizer (available at electronics and audio
shops) to demagnetize the heads (when the System turned off).
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MP3/WMA or JPEG tracks are not played back.
] The inserted disc may include both type of tracks (MP3/
WMA files and JPEG files). In this case, you can only play
back the files selected by the “FILE TYPE” setting (see
page 35).
Troubleshooting
If you are having a problem with your System, check this list
for a possible solution before calling for service.
] You have changed the “FILE TYPE” setting after you
inserted a disc. In this case, reload the disc.
General:
Adjustments or settings are suddenly canceled before
“NO AUDIO” appears.
] This System cannot play back illegally produced DVD
Audio discs.
you finish.
] There is a time limit. Repeat the procedure again.
Operations are disabled.
“LR ONLY” appears.
] The built-in microprocessor may malfunction due to
external electrical interference. Unplug the AC power cord
and then plug it back in.
] Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When
you play back such a disc, this System plays back the left
front and right front signals only.
Unable to operate the System from the remote control.
] The path between the remote control and the remote sensor
on the System is blocked.
The disc sound is discontinuous.
] The disc is scratched or dirty.
] The batteries are exhausted.
The disc tray does not open or close.
] The AC power cord is not plugged in.
] Child Lock is in use (see page 23).
No sound is heard.
] Speaker connections are incorrect or loose.
] Headphones are connected.
Tape Operations:
The cassette holder cannot be opened.
] Power supply from the AC power cord has been cut off
while the tape was running. Turn on the System.
No picture appears on the screen.
] The video cord connections are incorrect or loose.
No picture is displayed on the TV, the picture is blurred,
or the picture is divided into two parts.
] The System is connected to a TV which does not support
progressive scanning.
Recordings:
Impossible to record.
The left and right edges of the picture are missing on the
screen.
] Small tabs on the back of the cassette are removed. Cover
the holes with adhesive tape.
] Select “4:3 LB” for “MONITOR TYPE” (see page 34).
Timer Operations:
Daily Timer and Recording Timer do not work.
] The System has been turned on when the on-time comes.
Timer starts working only when the System is turned off.
Radio Operations:
Hard to listen to broadcasts because of noise.
] Antennas connections are incorrect or loose.
] The AM loop antenna is too close to the System.
] The FM antenna is not properly extended and positioned.
Daily Timer does not start playback.
] The disc loaded is a DVD video. Change the disc.
] Title/group number and chapter/track number are not
entered while setting the Daily Timer. Do not skip these
steps when you want to play a disc using Daily Timer.
Disc Operations:
The disc does not play.
] The disc is placed upside down. Place the disc with the label
Setup Menu Operations:
side up.
No subtitle appears on the display though you have
selected the initial subtitle language.
] Some DVDs are programmed to always display no subtitle
initially. If this happens, select the subtitle after starting play
(see page 18).
ID3 Tag on an MP3/WMA disc cannot be shown.
] There are two types of ID3 Tag—Version 1 and Version 2.
This System can only show ID3 Tag Version 1.
MP3/WMA/JPEG groups and tracks are not played
back as you expect.
] The playing order is determined when the disc was
recorded. It depends on the writing application.
Audio language is different from the one you have
selected as the initial audio language.
] Some DVDs are programmed to always use the original
language initially. If this happens, select the audio language
after starting play (see page 19).
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Code List
JW
KA
KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
Javanese
Georgian
Kazakh
SL
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
Afar
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Ameharic
Arabic
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean (KOR)
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati
Sesotho
Sundanese
Swedish
Swahili
Tamil
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
ST
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
SU
SV
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Maori
Telugu
Tajik
Bislama
Bengali, Bangla
Tibetan
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DA
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU
FA
FI
LV
MG
MI
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Breton
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
Catalan
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE
NL
NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Danish
Bhutani
Greek
Malay (MAY)
Maltese
TT
TW
UK
UR
UZ
VI
Twi
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque
Burmese
Nauru
Ukrainian
Urdu
Nepali
Uzbek
Persian
Dutch
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Wolof
Finnish
Norwegian
Occitan
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZU
FJ
Fiji
FO
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
Faroese
Frisian
(Afan) Oromo
Oriya
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu
Irish
Panjabi
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
PL
Polish
PS
Pashto, Pushto
Portuguese
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
PT
QU
RM
RN
RO
RU
RW
SA
Hindi
HR
HU
HY
IA
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Rumanian
Russian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
IE
SD
Sindhi
IK
SG
Sangho
IN
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Yiddish
SH
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
IS
SI
IW
JI
SK
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Country/Area Codes List
√
DK
DM
DO
DZ
EC
EE
EG
EH
ER
ES
Denmark
Dominica
Dominican Republic
Algeria
Ecuador
Estonia
Egypt
Western Sahara
Eritrea
Spain
JO
JP
Jordan
Japan
Kenya
Kyrgyzstan
Cambodia
AD
AE
AF
AG
AI
AL
AM
AN
AO
AQ
AR
AS
AT
AU
AW
AZ
BA
BB
BD
BE
BF
Andorra
United Arab Emirates
Afghanistan
Antigua and Barbuda
Anguilla
Albania
Armenia
Netherlands Antilles
Angola
Antarctica
Argentina
American Samoa
Austria
Australia
KE
KG
KH
KI
KM
KN
KP
Kiribati
Comoros
Saint Kitts and Nevis
Korea, Democratic People’s
Republic of
Korea, Republic of
Kuwait
Cayman Islands
Kazakhstan
Lao People’s Democratic
Republic
KR
KW
KY
KZ
LA
ET
FI
FJ
Ethiopia
Finland
Fiji
FK
FM
FO
FR
FX
GA
GB
GD
GE
GF
GH
GI
GL
GM
GN
GP
GQ
GR
GS
Falkland Islands (Malvinas)
Micronesia (Federated States of)
Faroe Islands
France
France, Metropolitan
Gabon
United Kingdom
Grenada
Georgia
French Guiana
Ghana
Gibraltar
Greenland
Gambia
Guinea
Guadeloupe
Equatorial Guinea
Greece
South Georgia and the South
Sandwich
Guatemala
Guam
Guinea-Bissau
Guyana
Hong Kong
Heard Island and McDonald
Islands
Honduras
Croatia
Haiti
Hungary
Indonesia
Ireland
Israel
India
British Indian Ocean Territory
Iraq
Iran (Islamic Republic of)
Iceland
Italy
Jamaica
Aruba
Azerbaijan
Bosnia and Herzegovina
Barbados
Bangladesh
Belgium
Burkina Faso
Bulgaria
Bahrain
Burundi
Benin
Bermuda
Brunei Darussalam
Bolivia
Brazil
Bahamas
Bhutan
Bouvet Island
Botswana
Belarus
Belize
Canada
Cocos (Keeling) Islands
Central African Republic
Congo
Switzerland
Côte d’Ivoire
Cook Islands
Chile
Cameroon
China
Colombia
Costa Rica
Cuba
Cape Verde
Christmas Island
Cyprus
Czech Republic
Germany
Djibouti
LB
LC
LI
LK
LR
LS
LT
LU
LV
LY
MA
MC
MD
MG
MH
ML
Lebanon
Saint Lucia
Liechtenstein
Sri Lanka
Liberia
Lesotho
Lithuania
Luxembourg
Latvia
Libyan Arab Jamahiriya
Morocco
Monaco
BG
BH
BI
BJ
BM
BN
BO
BR
BS
BT
BV
BW
BY
BZ
CA
CC
CF
CG
CH
CI
CK
CL
CM
CN
CO
CR
CU
CV
CX
CY
CZ
DE
DJ
Moldova, Republic of
Madagascar
Marshall Islands
Mali
MM Myanmar
MN
MO
MP
MQ
MR
MS
MT
MU
MV
Mongolia
Macau
GT
GU
GW
GY
HK
HM
Northern Mariana Islands
Martinique
Mauritania
Montserrat
Malta
HN
HR
HT
HU
ID
IE
IL
IN
IO
IQ
IR
IS
IT
Mauritius
Maldives
MW Malawi
MX
MY
MZ
NA
NC
NE
NF
NG
NI
Mexico
Malaysia
Mozambique
Namibia
New Caledonia
Niger
Norfolk Island
Nigeria
Nicaragua
Netherlands
Norway
NL
NO
JM
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NP
NR
NU
NZ
OM
PA
PE
PF
PG
PH
PK
PL
PM
PN
PR
PT
PW
PY
QA
RE
RO
RU
RW
SA
SB
Nepal
Nauru
Niue
New Zealand
Oman
Panama
Peru
French Polynesia
Papua New Guinea
Philippines
Pakistan
Poland
Saint Pierre and Miquelon
Pitcairn
Puerto Rico
Portugal
Palau
Paraguay
Qatar
Réunion
Romania
SE
SG
SH
SI
Sweden
Singapore
Saint Helena
Slovenia
Svalbard and Jan Mayen
Slovakia
Sierra Leone
San Marino
Senegal
Somalia
Suriname
Sao Tome and Principe
El Salvador
Syrian Arab Republic
Swaziland
Turks and Caicos Islands
Chad
French Southern Territories
Togo
Thailand
Tajikistan
Tokelau
Turkmenistan
Tunisia
Tonga
TT
Trinidad and Tobago
Tuvalu
Taiwan
Tanzania, United Republic of
Ukraine
Uganda
United States Minor Outlying
Islands
United States
Uruguay
TV
TW
TZ
UA
UG
UM
SJ
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SR
ST
SV
SY
SZ
TC
TD
TF
TG
TH
TJ
US
UY
UZ
VA
VC
VE
VG
VI
VN
VU
WF
WS
YE
YT
YU
ZA
ZM
ZR
ZW
Uzbekistan
Vatican City State (Holy See)
Saint Vincent and the Grenadines
Venezuela
Virgin Islands (British)
Virgin Islands (U.S.)
Vietnam
Vanuatu
Wallis and Futuna Islands
Samoa
Yemen
Mayotte
Yugoslavia
South Africa
Russian Federation
Rwanda
Saudi Arabia
Solomon Islands
Seychelles
Sudan
TK
TM
TN
TO
TP
TR
Zambia
Zaire
Zimbabwe
SC
SD
East Timor
Turkey
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals
DIGITAL AUDIO
OUTPUT
Output Signals
Playback disc
DVD Video
STREAM/PCM
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
PCM ONLY
with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Linear PCM
with 96 kHz, Linear PCM
with Dolby Digital
with DTS
Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
DVD Audio
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with 48/96/192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit Linear PCM
with 44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz,
16/20/24 bit Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with Dolby Digital
with DTS
Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
SVCD, VCD, CD
CD with DTS
DTS bitstream
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
MP3/WMA disc
32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
*While playing some DVDs, digital signals may be emitted at 20 bits or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DVD
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal if the discs are not copy-protected.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Parts Index
Refer to the pages to see how to use the buttons and controls.
Amplifier section
Output Power:
40 W (20 W + 20 W) at 4 Ω (10% THD)
AUX: 400 mV/50 kΩ
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT:
Remote control
Audio Input
Digital output:
–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm 30 nm)
STANDBY/ON
Video output:
Color system:
VIDEO (composite):
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
1
ZOOM
4
2
DVD LEVEL
5
3
VFP
6
NTSC/PAL selectable
10
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
4 Ω – 16 Ω
17
11, 12, 14,
16, 18–21,
26, 37
CLOCK/
TIMER
REV. MODE
FM MODE
S-VIDEO: Y (luminance)
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
17, 31
C (chrominance, burst)
COMPONENT: (Y)
(PB/PR)
Speakers/Impedance:
SET
10
10
TOP MENU
MENU
SET UP
ENTER
14, 20,
25–31, 33
ON SCREEN
CANCEL
RETURN
Tuner section
FM tuning range:
DVD/CD
TAPE
10, 13, 22, 28
87.50 MHz – 108.00 MHz
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
PLAY
MODE
11, 13,
AM (MW) tuning range:
20–23, 28
531 kHz – 1 710 kHz (at 9 kHz intervals)
530 kHz – 1 710 kHz (at 10 kHz intervals)
+
GROUP/TITLE
SLOW – SLOW
BASS/
3D
15
15
DISPLAY
RHYTHM AX
PHONIC TREBLE
9, 17
14
Tape section
DIMMER
Frequency response:
Wow and flutter:
60 Hz – 14 000 Hz
0.15% (WRMS)
FADE
MUTING
10, 15
16
11, 16–20,
VOLUME
23
RM-SUXP450U REMOTE CONTROL
Disc player section
Playable disc: DVD Video/DVD Audio
CD/VCD/SVCD
15
20
CD-R/CD-RW (CD/SVCD/VCD/MP3/
WMA/JPEG format)
DVD-R/DVD-RW (Video format)
Dynamic range:
Main unit
90 dB
500 lines
Horizontal resolution:
Wow and flutter:
Immeasurable
12
Speakers
Speaker units:
Impedance:
Full-range:
10 cm cone x 1
4 Ω
Dimensions (approx.):
145 mm x 230 mm x 191 mm
(W/H/D)
8
Mass (approx.):
2.2 kg each
14
15
Remote
sensor
Supplied Accessories
See page 3.
STANDBY/ON
DVD/CD
3D
PHONIC
RHYTHM AX
AUX
10, 11
VOLUME
General
TAPE
FM/AM
10, 11,
15
10–13,
22, 28
Power requirement:AC 110 V/AC 127 V/AC 220 V/
AC 230 V – AC 240 V
(adjustable
with the voltage selector), 50 Hz/60 Hz
65 W (at operation)
REC
DOWN
UP
30
Power consumption:
13, 23
10
4.1 W (on standby)
170 mm x 230 mm x 311 mm
11, 13
Dimensions (approx.):
Mass (approx.):
PHONES
(W/H/D)
4.8 kg
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mains (AC) Line Instruction (not applicable for Europe, U.S.A., Canada,
Australia, and U.K.)
主 (AC) 電源線路 ( 不適用于歐洲、美國、加拿大、澳洲及英國型號 )
P U S H O P E N
E
S
R
E
V
E
R
O
T
U
A
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
V
IDE
S-VIDEO
O
O
UT
SELE
CT
PA
NTSC
L
Y
PB
PR
CAUTION for mains (AC) line
AC
有關主 ( ) 電源線路的重要事項
BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your
mains (AC) line voltage corresponds with the
position of the voltage selector switch
provided on the outside of this equipment
and, if different, reset the voltage selector
switch, to prevent from a damage or risk of
fire/electric shock.
AC
接插電源以前，務請檢查當地的主 ( ) 電
源線路電壓是否和位于本机外面的電壓選擇
開關設定的位置一致。如果不一致，即重新
設定電壓選擇開關使符合當地電壓，以免損
坏机器或引起火災 / 触電的危險。
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
EN, CS
© 2004 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0504AIMMDWJEM
MICRO COMPONENT SYSTEM
UX-P450
—Consists of CA-UXP450 and SP-UXP450
SUPER VIDEO
INSTRUCTIONS
GVT0129-009A
[UX]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warnings, Cautions and Others
CAUTION—STANDBY/ON
button!
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely (all lamps and indications go off).
The STANDBY/ON
button in any position does not disconnect the mains line.
• When the unit is on standby, the STANDBY/ON lamp lights in red.
• When the unit is turned on, the STANDBY/ON lamp lights in green.
The power can be remote controlled.
G-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a
newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get
out.)
• Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted
candles, on the apparatus.
• When discarding batteries, environmental problems must
be considered and local rules or laws governing the
disposal of these batteries must be followed strictly.
• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or
splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as
vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
G-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service
personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED INSIDE THE UNIT.
Caution: Proper Ventilation
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire, and to prevent damage, locate the apparatus as follows:
1. Front: No obstructions and open spacing.
2. Sides/Top/Back: No obstructions should be placed in the areas shown by the dimensions below.
3. Bottom: Place on the level surface. Maintain an adequate air path for ventilation by placing on a stand with a height of 10 cm or
more.
CA-UXP450
SP-UXP450 CA-UXP450 SP-UXP450
G-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Introduction .....................................................2 On-Screen Disc Operations .......................... 24
Precautions ......................................................................2
How to Read This Manual...............................................2
On-screen Bar Information............................................24
Operations Using the On-screen Bar.............................25
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures.................................27
Operations on the CONTROL Screen...........................27
Getting Started.................................................3
Step 1: Unpack ................................................................3
Step 2: Prepare the Remote Control ................................3
Step 3: Hook Up ..............................................................4
Setting the Video Output Selector...................................6
Changing the Scanning Mode .........................................6
Advanced Tape Operations.......................... 29
Recording on a Tape......................................................29
Synchronized Disc Recording.......................................30
Timer Operations.......................................... 31
Before Operating the System..........................7
Playable Disc Types ........................................................7
Display Indicators............................................................8
Setting the Timer...........................................................31
Setup Menu Operations................................ 33
Operating Procedure......................................................33
Restricting the Review—Parental Lock........................37
Daily Operations—Playback ........................10
Listening to the Radio ...................................................11
Playing Back a Tape......................................................12
Playing Back a Disc.......................................................12
Additional Information................................. 39
Learning More about This System ................................39
Maintenance ..................................................................41
Troubleshooting.............................................................42
Language Code List.......................................................43
Country/Area Codes List...............................................44
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals .....................45
Specifications ................................................................46
Parts Index.....................................................................46
Daily Operations—Sound & Other
Adjustments ...................................................15
Adjusting the Volume....................................................15
Adjusting the Sound ......................................................15
Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound
Increase Level............................................................16
Changing the Display Brightness ..................................16
Changing the Picture Tone ............................................16
Setting the Clock ...........................................................17
Turning Off the Power Automatically...........................17
Unique DVD/VCD Operations .....................18
Selecting the View Angle..............................................18
Selecting the Subtitle Language ....................................18
Selecting the Audio Track.............................................19
Playing Back a Bonus Group ........................................19
Special Effect Playback.................................................20
Advanced Disc Operations............................21
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play..........21
Playing at Random—Random Play...............................22
Playing Repeatedly........................................................23
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock ........................23
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Precautions
How to Read This Manual
To make this manual as simple and easy-to-understand as
possible, we have adapted the following methods:
• Button and control operations are explained as listed in the
table below.
Installation
• Install in a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor
too cold—between 5°C and 35°C.
• Install the System in a location with adequate ventilation to
prevent internal heat buildup inside the System.
•
Some related tips and notes are explained later in the
sections “Additional Information” and
“Troubleshooting,” but not in the same section
explaining the operations. If you want to know more
about the functions, or if you have a doubt about the
functions, go to these sections and you will find the
answers.
DO NOT install the System in a location near
heat sources, or in a place subject to direct
sunlight, excessive dust or vibration.
• Leave sufficient distance between the System and the TV.
• Keep the speakers away from the TV to avoid interference
with TV.
Indicates that you press the button
briefly
.
Power sources
• When unplugging the System from the wall outlet, always
pull on the plug, not the AC power cord.
Indicates that you press the button
briefly and repeatedly until an
option you want is selected.
DO NOT handle the AC power cord with wet
hands.
Indicates that you press one of the
buttons.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lenses inside the System in
the following cases:
• After starting to heat the room
• In a damp room
• If the System is brought directly from a cold to a warm
place
Indicates that you press and hold the
button for specified seconds.
• The number inside the arrow
indicates the period of press (in this
example, 2 seconds).
2 sec.
• If no number is inside the arrow,
press and hold until the entire
procedure is complete or until you
get a result you want.
Should this occur, the System may malfunction. In this case,
leave the System turned on for a few hours until the moisture
evaporates, unplug the AC power cord, then plug it in again.
Others
Indicates that you turn the control
toward the specified direction(s).
• Should any metallic object or liquid fall into the System,
unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer before
operating any further.
DO NOT disassemble the System since there
are no user serviceable parts inside.
Indicates that this operation is only
possible using the remote control.
Remote
ONLY
• If you are not going to operate the System for an extended
period of time, unplug the AC power cord from the wall
outlet.
Indicates that this operation is only
possible using the buttons and controls on
the main unit.
Main Unit
ONLY
If anything goes wrong, unplug the AC power cord and
consult your dealer.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Step 1: Unpack
After unpacking, check to be sure that you have all the
following items. The number in parentheses indicates the
quantity of each piece supplied.
• FM antenna (1)
Step 1:Unpack the package and
check the accessories.
• AM loop antenna (1)
• Composite video cord (1)
• Remote control (1)
• Batteries (2)
• AC plug adaptor (1)
If any item is missing, consult your dealer immediately.
Step 2: Prepare the Remote Control
Insert the batteries into the remote control by matching the
polarity (+ and –) correctly.
1
Step 2:Prepare the remote control.
R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F)
2
Step 3:Hook up the components such
as AM/FM antennas, speakers,
etc. (see pages 4 to 6).
3
• DO NOT use an old battery together with a
new one.
• DO NOT use different types of batteries
together.
Finally plug the AC power cord.
• If the wall outlet does not match the AC plug, use the
supplied AC plug adaptor.
• DO NOT expose batteries to heat or flame.
• DO NOT leave the batteries in the battery
compartment when you are not going to use
the remote control for an extended period of
time. Otherwise, the remote control will be
damaged from battery leakage.
Now you can operate the System.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step 3: Hook Up
If you need more detailed information, see page 6.
Illustrations of the input/output terminals below are typical
examples.
When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals
since the terminal names actually printed on the rear may vary.
Before connecting optical digital
cord
Remove the protective
cap from the DVD
OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUT terminal.
Turn the power off to all components before connections.
For better FM/AM reception
AM loop antenna
Keep it connected.
Outdoor FM
antenna
Vinyl-covered wire (not supplied)
(not supplied)
Extend it horizontally.
Disconnect the supplied FM antenna, and connect to an outdoor FM
antenna using a 75 Ω wire with coaxial type connector.
VIDEO INPUT
VIDEO INPUT
Yellow
Composite video cord (supplied)
OR
S-video cord (not supplied)
OR
TV
VIDEO INPUT
Y
Green
Blue
P
B
P
R
Red
Component video cord (not supplied)
AV COMPU LINK cord (not supplied)
(cord with monaural mini plug)
AV
COMPU LINK
• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control
system” on page 6.
OPTICAL
DIGITAL IN
DECODER
Optical digital cord (not supplied)
AUDIO OUT
White
LEFT
RIGHT
AUX
Red
Audio cord (not supplied)
VCR, etc.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Turn it until the best reception is
obtained.
Before plugging in the System
Set the correct voltage for your area with the voltage
selector on the rear.
Use a screwdriver to rotate the voltage selector so
that the voltage marker is pointing at the same
voltage as where you are plugging in the unit. (See
also the back cover page.)
Voltage marker
FM antenna (supplied)
Extend it so that you can obtain
the best reception.
P U S H O P E N
O
R E V E R S E
A U T
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
SELECT
PA
L
NTSC
Y
PB
PR
DO NOT plug in before setting
the voltage selector and all
connection procedures are
complete.
To a wall outlet
Plug the AC power cord only after all connections and
selector settings on the rear are complete.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To connect the AM loop antenna
IMPORTANT
The speakers are magnetically shielded to avoid color
distortions on TVs. However, if not installed properly, it
may cause color distortions. So, pay attention to the
following when installing the speakers.
1 Hold
• When placing the speakers near a TV set, turn off the
TV’s main power switch or unplug it before installing the
speakers. Then wait at least 30 minutes before turning on
the TV’s main power switch again.
3 Release
Some TVs may still be affected even though you have
followed the above. If this happens, move the speakers
away from the TV.
2 Insert
• If the AM loop antenna wire or speaker cords are covered
with vinyl, remove the vinyl to expose the tip of the
antenna by twisting the vinyl.
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other
terminals, connecting cords and power cord.Also, keep the
antennas away from metallic parts of the System,
connecting cords, and theAC power cord. This could cause
poor reception.
AV COMPU LINK remote control system
This system allows you to use JVC’s TV with simple
operations; by starting playing back a disc, the TV
automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the
appropriate position so that you can view the playback
picture.
• To use AV COMPU LINK, you need to connect the
System and the TV by using a cord with monaural mini-
plugs (not supplied) in addition to the video input/output
connection through the COMPONENT jacks, S-VIDEO
jack or VIDEO (composite) jack on the rear.
To connect the speaker cords
Connect the right speaker to the RIGHT terminals, and the
left speaker to the LEFT terminals.
1 Hold
Setting the Video Output Selector
You can select the video output to match it to the color
system of your TV.
3 Release
NTSC: For an NTSC TV.
PAL: For a PAL TV.
2 Insert
VIDEO
OUT
SELECT
• When using a multi-color system
TV, either position will work.
• When connecting the speaker cords, match the polarity of
the speaker terminals: Red cord to (+) and black cord
to (–).
PAL
NTSC
Remote
ONLY
Changing the Scanning Mode
This System supports progressive scanning.
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to
each terminal.
• DO NOT allow the conductor of the speaker
cords to be in touch with the metallic parts of
the System.
If you connect a progressive TV through the COMPONENT
jacks, you can enjoy a high quality picture from the built-in
DVD player by selecting “PROGRE.”
PROGRESSIVE
PROGRE
0
INTER
(at the same time)
PROGRE Progressive scanning. For a progressive TV.
INTER
Interlaced scanning. For a conventional TV.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Operating the System
DVD Video—digital audio formats
The System can play back the following digital audio
Playable Disc Types
This unit has been designed to play back the following discs:
formats.
•
Linear PCM: Uncompressed digital audio, the same
format used for CDs and most studio masters.
Dolby Digital: Compressed digital audio, developed by
Dolby Laboratories, which enables multi-channel encode
to create the realistic surround sound.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems): Compressed digital
audio, developed by Digital Theater Systems, Inc., which
enables multi-channel like Dolby Digital. As the
compression ratio is lower than for Dolby Digital, it
provides wider dynamic range and better separation.
Region
Code*
Number
Video
Format
Disc Type
Mark (Logo)
•
DVD Video
DVD Audio
2
or
ALL
•
NTSC
or
PAL
Video CD
(VCD)
DIGITAL VIDEO
When playing a multi-channel encoded DVD, the System
properly converts these multi-channel signals into 2
channels, and emits the downmixed sound from the
speakers.
Super Video
CD (SVCD)
SUPER VIDEO
COMPACT
•
To enjoy the powerful sound of these multi-channel
encoded DVDs, connect a proper decoder or an amplifier
with a proper built-in decoder to the digital output terminal
on the rear.
Audio CD
DIGITAL AUDIO
CD-R
The System can play back CD-R or CD-RW
recorded in the Audio CD, Video CD, SVCD,
MP3, WMA, and JPEG formats.
CD-RW
DVD-R
The System can play back DVD-R or DVD-
RW recorded in the video format.
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “MLP Lossless”, and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• “DTS” and “DTS2.0+DIGITAL OUT” are registered
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents
and other intellectual property rights owned by
Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be authorized by
Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
DVD-RW
In addition to the above discs, this System can play back audio
data recorded on CD Text, CD-G (CD Graphics), and CD-Extra.
• The following discs cannot be played back:
DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD+R, DVD+RW, CD-I (CD-I
Ready), CD-ROM, Photo CD, etc.
Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage the
speakers.
• In this manual, “file” and “track” are interchangeably used
for MP3/WMA/JPEG operations.
* Note on Region Code
DVD players and DVDs have their own Region Code numbers.
CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH
DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY
COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY
CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE
PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 OR 625 PROGRESSIVE
SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED
THAT THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO
THE ‘STANDARD DEFINITION’ OUTPUT. IF THERE
ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR TV SET
COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p AND
625p DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR
CUSTOMER SERVICE CENTER.
This System can play back only DVDs recorded with the NTSC
or PAL color system whose Region Code numbers including
“2.”
EX.:
If a DVD with the improper Region Code numbers is loaded,
“RGN ERR (Region Code Error)” appears on the display and
playback will not start.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display Indicators
The indications on the display teach you a lot of things while you are operating the System.
Before operating the System, be familiar with when and how the indicator illuminates on the display.
1 2 3
4
5
6
7
SLEEP MONO ST MP3 WMA 3DPHONIC REC
123 REC
RANDOM
PRGM ALL BONUS B.S.P.
A.STANDBY
8
9
p
q
w
e
1 Rhythm Ax indicator
p BONUS indicator
• Lights when Rhythm Ax is activated.
• Lights when a DVD Audio with a bonus group is
2 Daily Timer indicators
detected.
•
: lights when Daily Timer stands by or is being preset.
q B.S.P. (Browsable Still Picture) indicator
• Lights when Browsable Still Pictures are detected while
playing a DVD Audio.
• 1/2/3: lights when a Daily Timer (1, 2, or 3) stands by;
flashes while setting or working.
• REC: lights when the Recording Timer stands by; flashes
while setting or working.
SLEEP indicator
w Main display
• While listening to radio: Band (or preset number) and
station frequency appear.
3
• Lights when the Sleep Timer is activated.
4 FM reception indicators
• While selecting “AUX”: “AUX” appears.
• While playing a tape: “TAPE” appears.
• While playing a disc: See “Indications on the main
display while operating a disc” on page 9.
e A(auto). STANDBY indicator
• Lights when Auto Standby is activated.
• Flashes when disc playback stops with Auto Standby
activated.
• MONO: lights while receiving an FM stereo station in
monaural.
• ST (stereo): lights while an FM stereo station with
sufficient signal strength is tuned in.
5 MP3/WMA indicators
• MP3: lights when an MP3 track is detected.
• WMA: lights when a WMA track is detected.
6 3D PHONIC indicator
• Lights when 3D Phonic is activated.
7 REC indicator
• Lights while recording.
8 Tape operation indicators
•
2 3 (tape direction):
–Lights to indicate the current tape running direction.
–Flashes slowly during playback and recording.
–Flashes quickly while rewinding a tape.
(reverse mode):
•
–
–
–
: tape play continues endlessly.
: tape automatically reverses once.
: tape play stops at the end of one side.
9Disc operation indicators
• RANDOM: lights when Random Play is activated.
• PRGM (program): lights when Program Play is activated.
•
(repeat)/ALL:
–
–
: lights when Disc Repeat is activated.
: lights when any Repeat other than the above is
ALL
activated.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indications on the main display while operating a disc
While playing back a disc:
While disc play is stopped:
• DVD Video:
• DVD Video:
Current chapter no.
Elapsed playing time
Total title no.
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current title and
chapter numbers for a few seconds.
• DVD Audio:
• DVD Audio:
Track no.
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time
Total group no.
Group no.
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group
and track numbers for a few seconds.
• Audio CD:
• Audio CD:
Current track no.
Total track no.
Total playing time
Elapsed playing time
• SVCD/VCD:
• SVCD/VCD:
Total track no.
Total playing time*
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time*
* Changes to “PBC” when stopping PBC playback.
* “PBC” appears while playing a disc with PBC.
• MP3/WMA:
• MP3/WMA:
Current track no.
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time
Current group no.
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group
and track numbers for a few seconds.
• JPEG:
• JPEG:
Current group no.
Current group no.
Current file no.
Current file no.
• If Resume is turned “ON” (see page 36), “RESUME” appears when you stop playback.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daily Operations—Playback
In this manual, the operation using the remote control
is mainly explained; however, you can use the buttons
and controls on the main unit if they have the same (or
similar) name and marks.
1
10 keys
1 Turn on the power.
The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit lights in
green.
SET
ENTER
TOP MENU
MENU
,
• Without pressing STANDBY/ON
, the System
,
,
turns on by pressing one of the source selecting
buttons in the next step.
RETURN
2
8
7
2 Select the source.
1/¡
3D PHONIC
Playback automatically starts if the selected source is
ready to start.
GROUP/TITLE
4/¢
• If you press AUX, start playback source on the
external component.
3
SHIFT
3 Adjust the volume.
4 Operate the target source as explained
later.
To turn off (stand by) the unit
STANDBY/ON
1
2
The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit
STANDBY/ON
lights in red.
• A small amount of power is always
consumed even while on standby.
For private listening
Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the
main unit. The sound will no longer come out of the
speakers. Be sure to turn down the volume before
connecting or putting the headphones.
• Disconnecting the headphones will activate the
speakers again.
DVD/CD
3
4
DO NOT turn off (stand by) the System with
the volume set to an extremely high level;
Otherwise, the sudden blast of sound can
damage your hearing, speakers and/or
headphones when you turn on the System or
start playback.
VOLUME
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To tune in to a station
While FM or AM is selected...
Listening to the Radio
Main Unit
ONLY
Remote control:
Main unit:
To set the AM tuner interval spacing
Before operating the tuner, it is required to select the
appropriate AM space interval used for your area.
2 sec.
2 sec.
GROUP/TITLE
DOWN
UP
1 Select the AM band.
FM
AM
Frequency starts changing on the display.
When a station (frequency) with sufficient signal strength is
tuned in, the frequency stops changing.
• When you repeatedly press the button, the frequency changes
step by step.
2 Turn off the power.
STANDBY/ON
To stop searching manually, press either button.
Remote
ONLY
If the received FM station is hard to listen
FM MODE
3 Select the appropriate AM space interval for your
9
area.
• You can only use the button and the control on the front
panel.
(at the same time)
STANDBY/ON
DOWN
The MONO indicator lights on the display. Reception will
improve though stereo effect is lost—Monaural reception
mode.
To restore the stereo effect, press the button again (the
MONO indicator goes off).
AM 9KHZ
(9 kHz interval)
While holding...
Remote
ONLY
To preset the stations
You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.
STANDBY/ON
UP
1 Tune in to a station you want to preset.
• You can also store the monaural reception mode for FM
preset stations if selected.
AM 10KHZ
(10 kHz interval)
2 Activate the preset number entry mode.
While holding...
SET
• Finish the following process while the indication on the
display is flashing.
To select the band (FM or AM)
FM
AM
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Select a preset number for the station you store.
To start:
To stop:
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
Examples:
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
To select preset number 5, press
5.
To select preset number 15,
press +10, then 5.
To select preset number 30,
press +10, +10, then 10.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
9
7
To rewind tape:
Before or after play...
GROUP/TITLE
10
10
Rewind the tape to the right.
Rewind the tape to the left.
• You can also use the ¡ or 1 buttons.
4 Store the station.
SET
To change the tape running direction
3 (forward play)
2 (reverse play)
Remote
ONLY
To tune in to a preset station
1 Select the band (FM or AM).
To reverse the tape automatically
FM
AM
REV. MODE
7
2 Select a preset number for the station you store.
(at the same time)
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
• You can also use the ¡ or
1 buttons.
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
Tape is played from the forward side to the
reverse side. When the reverse side is played
back, playback stops.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
9
7
Tape is automatically reversed, and playback
repeats until you stop it.
10
10
Tape will not be reversed. When the current
side of the tape reaches its end, playback stops.
Playing Back a Tape
Playing Back a Disc
To insert a tape
You can play back tapes of types I, II, and IV.
IMPORTANT: Before playing a disc, make sure of the
following...
Push
Insert
Close
• Turn on the TV and select an appropriate input mode on
the TV to view the pictures or on-screen displays on the
TV screen.
• For disc playback, you can change the initial setting to
your preference. See “Setup Menu Operations” on
page 33.
If “
” appears on the TV screen when you press a
With the tape side facing outside
button, the disc cannot accept the operation you have
tried to do, or data required for that operation is not
recorded on the disc.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On-screen guide icons
Before operating a disc, be familiar how a disc is recorded.
• DVD Video comprises of “Titles” which includes
• During DVD Video playback, the following icons may
appear on the TV:
“
“
Chapters,” DVD Audio/MP3/WMA/JPEG comprise of
Groups” which includes “Tracks,” and CD/SVCD/VCD
At the beginning of a scene containing multi-
angle views.
comprise of only “Tracks.”
• For JPEG playback, see “Operations on the CONTROL
Screen” on page 27.
At the beginning of a scene containing multi-
audio sounds.
To insert a disc
You can insert a disc while playing another source.
At the beginning of a scene containing multi-
subtitles.
• The following icons will be also shown on the TV to
indicate your current operation.
,
,
,
,
,
Remote
ONLY
To close the disc tray, press 0 again.
To select a title/group
While playing...
• If you press DVD/CD 3, disc tray closes automatically
and playback starts (depending on how the disc is
programmed internally).
GROUP/TITLE
To start:
To pause:
To stop:
DVD/CD
(at the same time)
• Group name appears for MP3/WMA discs.
To release, press
DVD/CD 3.
To select a chapter/track
•
While playing DVD/SVCD/VCD: This System can store
the stop point, and when you start playback again by
pressing DVD/CD 3 (even while on standby), it starts
from the position where you have stopped—Resume Play.
(“RESUME” appears on the display when you stop
playback.)
While playing...
• First time you press 4, you
GROUP/TITLE
can go back to the beginning of
the current chapter/track.
To stop completely while Resume is activated, press 7
twice. (To cancel Resume, see “RESUME” on page 36.)
• When operating the System, the on-screen guide icon (see
the following table) appears on the TV.
To deactivate the on-screen guide icons, see “ON
SCREEN GUIDE” on page 36.
Remote
ONLY
To locate a particular portion
While playing a disc except MP3/WMA...
+
SLOW
SLOW
–
x2
x2
x10
x10
x20
x20
x60
x60
x5
x5
• No sound comes out while searching on DVD Video/
SVCD/VCD.
To return to normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 For SVCD/VCD with PBC:
Remote
ONLY
While playing a disc with PBC, “PBC” appears on the
display.
When disc menu appears on the TV, select an item on the
menu. Playback of the selected item starts.
To locate an item directly
You can select a title/chapter/track directly and start
playback.
• For DVD Video, you can select a title before starting
playback, while you can select a chapter after starting
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
Examples:
playback
.
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10,
then 5.
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
Examples:
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10,
then 5.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
8
9
7
REV. MODE
FM MODE
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
10
10
8
9
7
10
10
To move to the next or previous page of the current
menu:
GROUP/TITLE
To use 3D Phonic
While playing...
3D
Moves to the next page.
PHONIC
ACTION
OFF
DRAMA
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
Moves to the previous page.
THEATER
3D PHONIC
(Canceled)
To return to the previous menu:
• The selected mode can only be shown on the TV.
ACTION
Suitable for action movies and sports
programs.
CANCEL
RETURN
DRAMA
Creates natural and warm sound. Enjoy
movies in a relaxed mood.
THEATER Enjoy sound effects like in a major theater.
(at the same time)
Remote
ONLY
To cancel PBC
To play back using the disc menu
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
7 For DVD Video/DVD Audio:
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
1 Show the disc menu.
MENU
REV. MODE
FM MODE
TOP MENU
SET UP
8
9
7
Select a track.
10
10
Stop playback.
2 Select an item on the disc menu.
Playback starts with the selected track.
ENTER
To reactivate PBC, press 7 (twice if Resume is turned
“ON”), then press DVD/CD 3.
• With some discs, you can also select items by entering the
number using the 10 keys.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments
Adjusting the Volume
Remote control
You can adjust the volume level from level 0 (VOL MIN) to
level 40 (VOL MAX).
Remote control:
Main unit:
VOLUME
VFP
DVD LEVEL
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
CLOCK/
TIMER
VOLUME
SET
Remote
ONLY
,
,
,
To drop the volume in a moment
ENTER
To restore the volume, press again, or
adjust the volume level.
FADE
MUTING
BASS/TREBLE
RHYTHM AX
DISPLAY
DIMMER
SHIFT
VOLUME
+/–
Adjusting the Sound
FADE
To emphasize rhythm feeling—RHYTHM AX
This function emphasizes bass attack feeling, and also
changes the subwoofer level.
MUTING
RHYTHM AX
RHYTHMAX
OFF
(Canceled)
Main unit
To adjust the tone
You can adjust the bass and treble level from –5 to +5.
To adjust the bass
BASS/
TREBLE
TRE
BASS
Canceled
VOLUME
RHYTHM AX
VOLUME +/–
To adjust the treble
BASS/
TREBLE
TRE
BASS
Canceled
VOLUME
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound
Changing the Picture Tone
Remote
ONLY
While showing a playback picture on the TV, you can select
the preset picture tone, or adjust it and store your own taste.
Increase Level
The DVD Video sound is sometimes recorded at a lower
level than for other discs and sources. You can set the
increase level for the currently loaded DVD Video, so you
do not have to adjust the volume every time you change the
source.
To select a preset picture tone
1 While playing, display VFP setting screen.
NORMAL
GAMMA
0
0
0
0
0
0
VFP
BRIGHTNESS
CONTRAST
SATURATION
TINT
DVD LEVEL
6
NORMAL MIDDLE
5
HIGH
SHARPNESS
(at the same time)
On the TV
(at the same time)
2 Select a preset picture tone.
NORMAL Original recording level.
NORMAL
CINEMA
USER1
MIDDLE
HIGH
Output level is increased (less than “HIGH”).
USER2
Output level is increased (more than
“MIDDLE”).
NORMAL
CINEMA
Normally select this.
• Once the current DVD is ejected, this setting is canceled
and set automatically to “NORMAL.”
Suitable for a movie source.
USER1/USER2 You can adjust parameters and can
Remote
ONLY
store the settings (see below).
Changing the Display Brightness
You can dim the display window.
To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.
To adjust the picture tone
DIMMER
DIM2
DIM1
1 Select “USER1” or “USER2.”
AUTO DIM
DIM OFF
(Canceled)
• Follow steps 1 and 2 explained above.
2 Select a parameter you want to adjust.
DIM1
Dims the display.
ENTER
DIM2
Erases the display illumination.
AUTO DIM
Erases the display illumination when
disc playback starts.*
• The display illuminates when
playback stops.
GAMMA
Adjust if the neutral color is bright or
dark (–3 to +3).
* “AUTO DIM” does not work for CD/MP3/WMA.
BRIGHTNESS Adjust if the entire picture is bright
or dark (–8 to +8).
CONTRAST
Adjust if the far and near positions
are unnatural (–7 to +7).
SATURATION Adjust if the picture is whitish or
blackish (–7 to +7).
TINT
Adjust if the human skin color is
unnatural (–7 to +7).
SHARPNESS
Adjust if the picture is indistinct
(–8 to +8).
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Adjust the parameter.
Turning Off the Power
Remote
ONLY
ENTER
Automatically
To turn off the unit after playback is over—Auto
Standby
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 to adjust other parameters.
On
To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.
Canceled
Remote
ONLY
Setting the Clock
(at the same time)
Without setting the built-in clock, you cannot use Daily
Timers, Recording Timer (see page 31) and Sleep Timer.
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL
or CLOCK/TIMER. You can return to the previous step.
When Auto Standby is in use, the A.STANDBY indicator
lights on the display.
When disc play stops, the A.STANDBY indicator starts
flashing. If no operation is done for about 3 minutes while
the indicator is flashing, the System turns off (stands by)
automatically.
1 Activate the clock setting mode.
CLOCK/
TIMER
• Auto Standby does not work while you are listening to
radio (FM/AM) and the external component (AUX).
To turn off the unit after a certain period of time
—Sleep Timer
• If you have already adjusted the clock before, press the
button repeatedly until the clock setting mode is
selected.
1 Specify the time (in minutes).
SLEEP
2 Adjust the hour.
A.STANDBY
SET
10 20 30 60 90 120 150
Canceled
2 Wait until the set time goes off.
3 Adjust the minute.
To check the time remaining until the shut-off time
SET
SLEEP
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
Now the built-in clock starts working.
• If you press the button repeatedly, you can change the shut-
off time.
To check the current clock time during play
DISPLAY
Clock
Source information
• While playing a DVD and MP3/WMA, you cannot check
the current clock time (see page 9) .
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unique DVD/VCD Operations
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the View Angle
Remote control
While playing back a chapter (of DVD Video) containing
multi-view angles, you can view the same scene from
different angles.
• You can also select the multi-view angles using the on-
screen bar (see page 24).
SUB TITLE
ANGLE
AUDIO
ZOOM
While playing...
10 keys
ANGLE
3
,
,
,
ENTER
DVD/CD 3
8
(at the same time)
7
Ex.:
SLOW –/+
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
2
3
SHIFT
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
2
3
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Subtitle Language
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter (of DVD
Video) containing subtitles in different languages, you can
select the subtitle language to display on the TV.
For SVCD: While playing, you can select the subtitles even
if no subtitles are recorded on the disc.
• You can also select the subtitle language using the on-
screen bar (see page 24).
While playing a DVD Video...
1 Display the subtitle selection window.
1/3
ENGLISH
1/3
SUB TITLE
ENGLISH
2
(at the same time)
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select the subtitle language.
While playing a DVD Video...
Ex.:
1/3
2/3
3/3
ENGLISH
FRENCH
JAPANESE
Ex.:
1/3
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
ENGLISH
1/3
2/3
3/3
ENGLISH
FRENCH
JAPANESE
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
While playing a DVD Audio...
Ex.:
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
2
3
While playing an SVCD video...
While playing a Karaoke SVCD or VCD...
SUB TITLE
SVCD
AUDIO
ST1
R2
ST2
L1
2
1
L2
R1
VCD
ST
L
R
(at the same time)
(at the same time)
–/4
OFF
1/4
1
2/4
2
ST1/ST2 To listen to normal stereo (2 channel)
ST
playback.
4/4
3/4
L1/L2/L
To listen to the left audio channel.
4
3
R1/R2/R To listen to the right audio channel.
• SVCD can have 4 audio channels. Karaoke SVCD usually
uses these 4 channels to record two 2-channel recordings
(ST1/ST2).
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Audio Track
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter containing
audio languages, you can select the language to listen to.
For DVD Audio: While playing back a track containing
audio channels, you can select the audio channel to listen to.
For Karaoke SVCD/VCD: When playing back a track, you
can select the audio channel to play.
Remote
ONLY
Playing Back a Bonus Group
Some DVD Audios have a special group called “bonus
group” whose contents are not open to the public.
• To play back a bonus group, you have to enter the specific
“key number” (a kind of password) for the bonus group.
The way of getting the key number depends on the disc.
• You can also select the audio track using the on-screen bar
(see page 24).
1 Select the bonus group.
AUDIO
• The bonus group is usually recorded as the last group
(for example, if a disc contains 4 groups including a
bonus group, “group 4” is the bonus group).
• For how to select the group, see “To select a title/group”
on page 13.
1
(at the same time)
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Enter the key number.
2 Select slow motion speed.
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
+
SLOW
SLOW
–
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ENTER
Forward slow motion starts.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
Reverse slow motion* starts.
+
SLOW
SLOW
1/32
1/32
1/16
1/16
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
1/2
3
Follow the interactive instructions shown on the
screen.
–
To cancel the key number entry, press 7.
*Not available for SVCD/VCD.
Remote
ONLY
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
Special Effect Playback
Still picture playback
To replay the previous scenes
(One-Touch Replay)
To start still picture play- To resume normal
back:
• This function is only used while playing DVD Video.
While playing back...
playback:
While playing...
The playback position moves
back about 10 seconds before the
current position (only within the
same title).
DVD/CD
Frame-by-frame playback
Remote
ONLY
Zoom
1 While playing...
1 While playing back...
Still picture playback starts.
ZOOM
4
2 Advance the still picture frame by frame.
(at the same time)
ZOOM
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
ZOOM 1
ZOOM 2
ZOOM 3
ZOOM 4
ZOOM 5
4
ZOOM OFF
ZOOM 6
Slow-motion playback
1 While playing...
2 Move the zoomed-in position.
Still picture playback starts.
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding
SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Disc Operations
Programming the Playing Order—
Remote control
Remote
ONLY
Program Play
You can arrange the playing order of the chapters or tracks
(up to 99) before you start playback.
1 Before starting playback, activate Program Play.
PLAY
10 keys
MODE
PROGRAM
RANDOM
Canceled
ENTER
,
CANCEL
7
DVD/CD 3
PRGM
8
PLAY
On the display
MODE
4
/
¢
REPEAT
REPEAT A-B
PROGRAM
No Group/Title
1
2
3
Track/Chapter
SHIFT
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
USE NUMERIC KEYS TO PROGRAM TRACKS.
USE CANCEL TO DELETE THE PROGRAM.
On the TV
2 Select chapters or tracks you want for Program Play.
• For DVD/MP3/WMA:
Main unit
1 Select a title or group number.
2 Select a chapter or track number.
3 Repeat the above steps 1 and 2.
• For SVCD/VCD/CD:
1 Select tracks.
To enter the numbers directly:
Examples:
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
To enter number 5, press 5.
To enter number 15, press +10,
then 5.
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
To enter number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
9
7
10
10
DVD/CD 3
, 7,
4
¢
0
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
3 Start playback.
Playing at Random—Random Play
You can play all chapters or tracks at random.
• Random Play cannot be used for some DVDs.
Playback starts in the order you
have programmed.
DVD/CD
1 Before starting playback, activate Random Play.
PLAY
MODE
To skip a step:
To pause:
To stop:
PROGRAM
RANDOM
GROUP/TITLE
Canceled
To release, press
DVD/CD 3.
RANDOM
To check the programmed contents
Before or after playback...
2 Start playback.
In the reverse order.
Playback starts in random order.
Random Play ends when the
entire disc has been played.
DVD/CD
In the programmed order.
To skip a chapter/
track:
To pause:
To stop:
• You can also use 4 or ¢ to check the programmed
contents.
To modify the program
Before or after playback...
To release, press
DVD/CD 3.
To erase the last step:
To erase the entire
program:
CANCEL
RETURN
To exit from Random Play
Before or after playback...
PLAY
MODE
PROGRAM
RANDOM
To add steps in the program:
Repeat step 2.
Canceled
To exit from Program Play
Before or after playback...
PLAY
MODE
PROGRAM
RANDOM
Canceled
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
A-B Repeat
Playing Repeatedly
You can repeat playback of a desired portion by specifying
the beginning (point A) and the ending (point B).
• A-B Repeat cannot be used for MP3/WMA and for some
DVDs.
• You can also select the repeat mode using the on-screen
bar (see page 25).
• A-B Repeat can be used within the same title while playing
a DVD Video, and within the same track for the other
discs.
Repeat Play
You can repeat playback.
• For DVD Video:
While playing...
1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), select
REPEAT A-B
the start point (A).
*
REPEAT
REP CHAP
REP TTL
starts flashing on the
REP OFF
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
display.
(Canceled)
A-
•
appears on the TV
if the TV is turned on.
• For DVD Audio:
While playing or before playback...
(at the same time)
REPEAT A-B
*
REPEAT
REP TRK
REP GRP
2 Select the end point (B).
REP OFF
(Canceled)
stops flashing.
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
A-B
•
appears on the
• For MP3/WMA:
While playing or before playback...
TV.
REPEAT A-B
• You can search for the end
point using the ¡ button.
REPEAT
*
REP TRK
REP GRP
REP ALL
(at the same time)
REP OFF
(Canceled)
To cancel A-B Repeat, press REPEAT A-B again while
holding SHIFT.
• For CD/SVCD/VCD:
While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD) or before
playback...
• A-B Repeat will also be canceled when you stop play or
skip the chapter or track.
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
*
REP ALL
REP TRK
Main Unit
ONLY
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock
REP OFF
(Canceled)
You can lock the disc tray so that no one can eject the loaded
disc.
• This is possible while the System is on standby.
REP CHAP* Repeats the current chapter.
REP TTL Repeats the current title.
REP TRK* Repeats the current track.
REP GRP Repeats the current group.
REP ALL Repeats the disc or program.
While the disc tray is closed...
*During Program Play and Random Play, “REP STEP”
appears instead of these indications, and repeat modes
change as follows for all the discs.
(at the same time)
REP STEP
REP ALL
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.
“UNLOCKED” appears on the display.
REP OFF
(Canceled)
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On-Screen Disc Operations
On-screen Bar Information
Remote control
You can check the disc information (except for MP3/WMA/
JPEG disc) and use some functions through the on-screen
bar.
ZOOM
10 keys
1 Disc type
2 Playback information
Indication
Mbps
Meanings
Current transfer rate
(Megabits per second)
ENTER
,
,
,
ON SCREEN
CANCEL
TITLE
CHAP
2
3
DVD/CD 3
8
Current title
7
REPEAT
¡
Current chapter
Current group
Current track
Time indications
4
/
¢
GROUP
1
TRACK 14
TOTAL1:25:58
SHIFT
3 Operation modes
Indication
Meanings
Playback
/
/
Forward/Reverse search
Forward/Reverse slow-motion
On-screen bars
DVD Video
Pause
Stop
1
2
3
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
4 Function icons (on the pull-down menu)
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
TRACK
1
/3/1
1/
3
1
Indication
Meanings
TIME
Select to change the time indication.
4
DVD Audio
OFF
Select to repeat playback.
Select for time search.
Select for chapter search.
Select for track search.
1
2
3
3
3
3
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
DVD-AUDIO
CHAP.
TIME
OFF
1/
3
1/
3
PAGE
TRACK
4
SVCD
Select to change the audio language or
channel (see also page 19).
1/3
1/3
1
2
Select to change subtitle language
(see also page 18).
TRACK
3
TIME
00:58
SVCD
TIME
O
F
F
S
T
1
-/
4
Select to change the view angle (see
also page 18).
1/3
4
4
VCD
1
2
Select to change the page.
PAGE 1 / 5
TRACK
3
TIME
00:58
VCD
TIME
O
F
F
S
T
CD
1
2
TRACK
3
TIME
00:58
CD
TIME
O
F
F
4
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Operations Using the On-screen Bar
For detailed operations of the following functions, see
also “Operations Using the On-screen Bar” on the left.
Ex.: Selecting a subtitle (French) for DVD Video
While a disc is selected as the source...
To change the time information
You can change the time information in the on-screen bar
and the display window on the main unit.
1 Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
ON SCREEN
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pull-
down menu.
8.5Mbps
TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TIME 0:00:58
DVD-VIDEO
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
DVD-VIDEO
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3
1
/
3
1
/1
TIME
2 Make sure
is selected (highlighted).
Goes off
3 Change the time indication.
2 Select (highlight) the item you want.
ENTER
REM 0:11:23
TOTAL 1:01:58
TIME 0:00:58
T.REM 0:35:24
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
REM
Elapsed playing time of the current
chapter/track.
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
3 Display the pop-up window.
Remaining time of the current chapter/
track.
ENTER
T
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
3
TIME 0:00:58
TOTAL
T.REM
Elapsed disc time.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
Remaining disc time.
ENGLISH
To erase the on-screen bar
4 Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
ON SCREEN
T
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
3
TIME 0:00:58
1
/3/1
2
/
3
1
FRENCH
Repeat Play
• See also page 23.
5 Finish the setting.
1 While playing a disc (without PBC for SVCD/VCD),
display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD Video: Repeat Play can be selected
before starting playback.
Pop-up window goes off.
ENTER
2 Select
.
OFF
3 Display the pop-up window.
To erase the on-screen bar
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
ON SCREEN
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
OFF
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Select the repeat mode you want.
Time Search
You can move to a particular point by specifying the elapsed
playing time from the beginning.
A-B
Repeats a desired portion (see below).
TITLE
GROUP
ALL
Repeats the current title.
Repeats the current group.
1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display
the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD: Time Search can be used before
starting playback.
Repeats the disc (except for DVD) or
program.
CHAPTER
TRACK*
OFF
*
Repeats the current chapter.
Repeats the current track.
Cancels Repeat Play.
2 Select
.
3 Display the pop-up window.
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
*During Program Play and Random Play, “STEP”
appears.
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
TIME _ : _ _ : _ _
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
5 Finish the setting.
4 Enter the time.
You can specify the time in hours/minutes/seconds.
ENTER
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
Examples:
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
To move to a point of 1
(hours): 02 (minutes): 00
(seconds), press 1, 0, 2, 0, then
0.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
A-B Repeat
• See also page 23.
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
To move to a point of 54
(minutes): 00 (seconds), press
0, 5, 4, 0, then 0.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pull-
down menu.
2 Select
.
OFF
• It is always required to enter the hour digit (even “0”
hour), but it is not required to enter trailing zeros (the
last two digits in the examples above).
3 Display the pop-up window.
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
• To correct a misentry, press Cursor
entry.
<
to erase the last
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
OFF
5 Finish the setting.
4 Select “A-B.”
The System starts playing the disc
from the selected playing time.
ENTER
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
1/3/1
1/
3
1
A–B
5 Select the start point (A).
Chapter/Track Search
You can search for the chapter (DVD Video) or track (DVD
Audio) number to play.
ENTER
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
C
H
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
A-
CHAP.
1
/3
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pull-
down menu.
6 Select the end point (B).
CHAP.
TRACK
2 Select
or
.
A-B Repeat starts. The selected
portion plays repeatedly.
• Before pressing ENTER, you can
search for the end point using the
¡ button.
ENTER
3 Display the pop-up window.
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
CHAPTER
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
_
To cancel A-B Repeat, repeat steps 1 to 3, and select “OFF”
in step 4.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
4 Enter the desired chapter/track number.
Operations on the CONTROL Screen
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
Examples:
To select chapter/track 5, press
5.
To select chapter/track 15,
press 1, then 5.
The CONTROL screen automatically appears on the TV
when you load an MP3, WMA, or JPEG disc.
You can search for and play the desired tracks through the
CONTROL screen.
• If both types of files (MP3/WMA files and JPEG files) are
recorded on a disc, select the file type to play (see page 35).
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
To select chapter/track 30,
press 3, then 0.
CONTROL screen
Ex.: When the MP3 disc is loaded.
6
• To correct a misentry, press the 10 keys until the
desired number shown in the pop-up window.
7
8
5 Finish the setting.
REPEAT TRACK Time : 00:00:14
1
The System starts playing the
Group : 2 / 3
Track : 5 / 14 (Total 41)
ENTER
9
searched chapter or track.
Spring
Summer
Fall
Cloudy.mp3
Fair.mp3
Fog.mp3
Hail.mp3
Indian summer.mp3
Rain.mp3
Shower.mp3
Snow.mp3
Thunder.mp3
Typhoon.mp3
Wind.mp3
2
3
Winter
Track Information
0
-
Title
Rain
Artist
Remote
4
5
ONLY
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures
Album
Winter sky.mp3
While playing back a track (of DVD Audio) linked to
browsable still pictures (BSP), you can select the still picture
(turn the page) to be shown on the TV.
• If a track is linked to browsable still pictures (BSP), they
are usually shown in turn automatically during playback.
1 Current group number/total group number
2 Current group (in blue)
3 Group list
4 Track information (ID3 Tag Version 1.0: only for
MP3/WMA)
5 Current track (in blue)
6 Repeat Play setting
7 Elapsed playing time of the current track
(only for MP3/WMA)
1 While playing a DVD Audio, display the on-screen
bar with the pull-down menu.
2 Select
.
PAGE 1 / 5
3 Display the pop-up window.
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
1/ 1/
DVD-AUDIO
TIME
8 Operation mode icon
OFF
3
5
TRACK
PAGE
9 Current track number/total number of tracks in the
current group (total number of tracks on the loaded
disc)
0 Highlight (green) bar
- Track list
1
4 Select a still picture you want.
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
1/ 3/
DVD-AUDIO
TIME
OFF
3
5
TRACK
PAGE
3
5 Finish the setting.
ENTER
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To move the highlight (green) bar between group list and
track list:
To repeat slide-show for JPEG
While playing or before starting playback...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
Moves the bar to the track
list.
REP GRP
REP ALL
REP OFF
(Canceled)
Moves the bar to the group
list.
REP GRP Repeats the current group.
REP ALL Repeats the disc.
To select a group/track in the list:
Move the highlight bar to a desired
item.
• For Repeat Play of MP3/WMA, see page 23.
• If you move the highlight bar
while playing back an MP3/
WMA disc, the selected track
starts playback automatically.
To zoom in the still picture
• You cannot zoom in the still picture during slide-show.
1 While playing back a still picture...
• During slide-show, press 8 to display the still picture,
then...
To start playback
For MP3/WMA:
ZOOM
4
Playback starts with the selected
track.
ENTER
• Pressing DVD/CD 3 also starts
playback.
(at the same time)
ZOOM
For JPEG:
ZOOM 1
ZOOM 2
4
The selected track (still picture)
is displayed until you change it.
ZOOM OFF
ENTER
2 Move the zoomed-in position.
Slide-show playback starts.
Each track (still picture) is
shown on the screen for about 3
seconds, then changes one after
another.
DVD/CD
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding
• Once you start playing back a JPEG track, the CONTROL
SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.
screen goes off.
• To cancel slide-show, and display the current still picture,
press 8.
To skip a track:
To stop playback:
GROUP/TITLE
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Tape Operations
IMPORTANT
It may be unlawful to record or play back copyrighted
Remote control
material without the consent of the copyright owner.
Recording on a Tape
You can use type I tapes for recording.
• To play a tape, see page 12.
REV. MODE
1 Insert a recordable cassette.
Push
Insert
Close
TAPE 2 3
FM/AM
AUX
DVD/CD
3
7
With the tape side facing outside
2 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
SHIFT
settings on the display.
Reverse mode indicator
Tape direction indicator
Current source
Main unit
To change the direction
3 (forward)
2 (reverse)
PUSH OPEN 0
To change the Reverse mode if necessary
REV. MODE
7
(at the same time)
TAPE 2 3
FM/AM
AUX
To record on both sides.
DVD/CD
3
• When using Reverse Mode, start
recording in the forward (3) direction.
REC
(
)
7
To record on only one side.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Select and start playing the source—“FM,” “AM,”
“DVD/CD,” or “AUX.”
To record Program Play or Random Play
1 Select Program Play (and make a program) or Random
Play, but do not start playback.
• When recording a disc, you can also use “Synchronized
Disc Recording” (see below).
2 Press REC to start recording.
• When disc play stops, recording continues. It is
required that recording be stopped manually.
4 Start recording.
REC
To record only your favorite track
You can specify tracks to be recorded on the tape while
listening to a disc (except for DVD Video).
On the main unit
1 Start playing a disc.
To stop recording:
DVD/CD
2 While a track you want to record on the tape is
playing...
Synchronized Disc Recording
You can start and stop both disc play and tape recording at
the same time.
The disc player returns to the
REC
beginning of that track and the
track is recorded on the tape.
After recording the track, the
disc player and cassette deck
To record the entire disc
On the main unit
automatically stop.
1 Load a disc and insert a recordable cassette.
• If the current playing source is not the disc player, press
DVD/CD 3, then 7.
3 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to record other tracks you want.
• You can exchange the discs if necessary.
2 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
settings on the display.
To protect your recording
Cassettes have two small tabs on the back to protect
from unexpected erasure or re-recording.
To protect your recording, remove these tabs.
• See step 2 of “Recording on a Tape” on page 29.
3 Start recording.
The System automatically
REC
creates 4-second blanks between
the tunes recorded on the tapes.
On the main unit
To re-record on a protected tape, cover the holes with
adhesive tape.
• When either disc play* or recording ends, both disc player
and the cassette deck stop at the same time.
• If you press REC soon after the recording is stopped, “NO
REC” may appear.
* For DVD Video: When a title is finished playing.
To record a “Live” disc
It will not be desirable to put 4-second blank portions
between the tunes recorded on the tape.
To record the entire disc without any interruption
recorded, pause the disc play (press DVD/CD 3, then 8)
before pressing REC.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer Operations
Remote
ONLY
Setting the Timer
Remote control
Using Daily Timer, you can wake up with your favorite
song. On the other hand, with Recording Timer, you can
make a tape of a radio broadcast automatically.
• You can store three Daily Timer settings and one
Recording Timer setting; however, you can activate only
one of Daily Timers and Recording Timer at the same time.
• To exit from the timer setting, press CLOCK/TIMER as
required.
STANDBY/ON
CLOCK/
TIMER
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL.
You can return to the previous step.
SET
,
1 Select one of the timer setting modes you want to set—
Daily 1 ON time, Daily 2 ON time, Daily 3 ON time, or
Recording Timer ON time.
CANCEL
Daily 1 Timer
Daily 2 Timer
Daily 3 Timer
CLOCK/
TIMER
DAILY 1*
ON (Time)
DAILY 2
*
ON (Time)
DAILY 3
*
ON (Time)
ON (Time)
Canceled
Clock setting
REC TMR
(see page 17)
Recording Timer
1
Ex. When Daily Timer 1 setting mode is selected
2 Make the timer setting as you want.
Repeat the following operations until you finish setting in
the following order—
SET
For Daily Timers:
1
2
3
Set the hour then the minute for on-time.
Set the hour then the minute for off-time.
Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”
“TUNER AM,” “TAPE,” “DISC,” or “AUX.”
1
* Daily Timer initial settings when shipped from the
factory
4
For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a
preset channel.
• DAILY 1:ON Time (6:00)/OFF Time (8:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
• DAILY 2:ON Time (12:00)/OFF Time (14:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
• DAILY 3:ON Time (18:00)/OFF Time (20:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
For “DISC”: Select the title/group number, then
the chapter/track number.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Select the volume level.
•You can select the volume level (“VOL 0” to
“VOL 50” and “VOL – –”).
If you select “VOL – –,” the volume is set to the last
level when the unit has been turned off.
How Recording Timer actually works
When Recording Timer has been set, Timer (
indicator and the REC indicator are lit on the display.
Recording Timer works only once.
)
Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information
appears in sequence.
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station or
changes the source to “AUX”, sets the volume level to the
preset level, and starts recording.
For Recording Timer:
1
2
3
Set the hour then the minute for on-time.
Set the hour then the minute for off-time.
Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”
“TUNER AM,” or “AUX.”
When the off-time comes
The System stops recording, and turns off (stands by).
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change
it.
4
For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a
preset channel.
Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information
appears in sequence.
To turn off the Timer after its setting is done
Since Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday,
you may need to cancel it on some particular days.
• Recording Timer can also be canceled temporarily.
3 Turn off the unit (on standby) if you have set the timer
with the System turned on.
STANDBY/ON
1 Select the Timer you want to cancel.
Daily 1 Timer
Daily 2 Timer
Daily 3 Timer
CLOCK/
TIMER
DAILY 1*
ON (Time)
DAILY 2
*
ON (Time)
DAILY 3
*
ON (Time)
ON (Time)
Canceled
Clock setting
REC TMR
(see page 17)
Recording Timer
How Daily Timer actually works
1
Ex.To cancel Daily
Timer 1
Once the Daily Timer has been set, the timer (
)
indicator and timer number indicator (1/2/3) are lit on the
display. Daily Timer is activated at the same time
everyday until the timer is turned off manually (see the
next column) or another timer is activated.
2 Turn off the selected Timer.
To turn on the Timer
CANCEL
RETURN
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, starts playing the specified source
(except “AUX”), and sets the volume level to the preset
level.
• While Daily Timer is working, the timer (
and timer number indicator (1/2/3) flash on the display.
1 Select the Timer (DAILY 1/2/3, and REC TMR) you
want to activate.
) indicator
Daily 1 Timer
Daily 2 Timer
Daily 3 Timer
CLOCK/
TIMER
When the off-time comes
The System stops playback, and turns off (stands by)
automatically.
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change
DAILY 1
ON (Time)
DAILY 2
ON (Time)
DAILY 3
ON (Time)
REC TMR
ON (Time)
Canceled
Clock setting
(see page 17)
Recording Timer
it.
2 Activate the selected Timer.
SET
1
Ex. When Daily Timer 1 (DAILY 1) is
activated
3 Wait until the indication goes off.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Menu Operations
.
Remote
ONLY
Operating Procedure
Remote control
You can use the Setup Menus only when a disc is selected
as the source and its playback is not yet started.
Ex.: Selecting “STILL PICTURE” for “FILE TYPE”:
1 Display the Setup Menu.
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
MENU
SET UP
10 keys
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
SET UP
ENTER
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
,
,
,
(at the same time)
2 Select one of the Setup Menus.
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
AUDIO
SHIFT
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
3 Select the item you want to adjust.
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
Setup Menu Icons
AUDIO
The icon for the selected Setup Menu will be
highlighted.
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
4 Display the pop-up window.
Ex.: LANGUAGE Setup Menu is selected.
PICTURE
ENTER
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
1
2
3
4
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
AUDIO
AUDIO
STILL PICTURE
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT . USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
5 Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
AUDIO
AUDIO
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
STILL PICTURE
SELECT
ENTER
USE USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO SELECT
.
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
1 LANGUAGE Setup Menu
2 PICTURE Setup Menu
3 AUDIO Setup Menu
4 OTHERS Setup Menu
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Finish the setting.
SUBTITLE
ENTER
Some discs have multiple subtitle languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43) or “OFF (no subtitle).”
7 Repeat steps 3 to 4 to set other items on the same
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
Setup Menu.
Select one of the languages shown on the TV from—
ENGLISH, SPANISH and CHINESE.
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set other items on another Setup
Menu.
To exit from the Setup Menu
PICTURE Setup Menu
You can select the desired options concerning a picture or
monitor screen.
MENU
SET UP
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
(at the same time)
AUDIO
LANGUAGE Setup Menu
You can select the initial languages for disc playback. You
can also select the language shown on the TV screen while
operating this System.
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
MONITOR TYPE
LANGUAGE
Select the monitor type of your TV to play DVD Video
recorded with aspect ratio of 16:9.
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
For the multi-color system TV
When you use a multi-color system TV, you can change the
color system of the System automatically by selecting
“MULTI” options for the monitor type. In this case, the color
system of the System is changed to match to that of the
loaded disc regardless of the VIDEO OUT SELECT setting
(see page 6).
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
MENU LANGUAGE
Some discs have multiple menu languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43).
Select one of the following:
16:9 / 16:9 MULTI
:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 16:9 (wide
TV).
AUDIO LANGUAGE
4:3 LB (Letter Box) / 4:3 MULTI LB:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3
(conventional TV). While viewing a wide screen
picture, the black bars appear on the top and the bottom
of the screen.
Some discs have multiple audio languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43).
4:3 PS (Pan Scan) / 4:3 MULTI PS:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3. While
viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not
appear; however, the left and right edges of the pictures
will not be shown on the screen.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO Setup Menu
You can adjust the sound settings of the System.
AUDIO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
DOWN MIX
STREAM/PCM
DOLBY SURROUND
AUTO
Ex.: 16:9
Ex.: 4:3 LB
Ex: 4:3 PS
D. RANGE COMPRESSION
PICTURE SOURCE
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting an
appropriate option—picture source type (either video source
or film source).
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
When using the digital output terminal on the rear, set this
correctly according to the connected component.
Select one of the following:
AUTO: Normally select this.
When playing back a disc containing both video
and film sources, the System automatically
changes the processing to match it to the picture
type (film or video source) of the current chapter.
Select one of the following:
PCM ONLY:
To connect to a linear PCM digital
equipment such as an MD recorder.
FILM: To play a film source disc.
VIDEO: To play a video source disc.
DOLBYDIGITAL To connect to a Dolby Digital decoder
/PCM:
or an amplifier with a built-in Dolby
Digital decoder.
STREAM/PCM: To connect to a DTS decoder or an
amplifier with a built-in DTS decoder.
SCREEN SAVER
You can activate or deactivate screen saver while operating
the built-in disc player.
• See also “DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals” on
page 45.
Select one of the following:
ON:
The pictures on the TV becomes dark when no
operation is done for about 5 minutes.
DOWN MIX
When playing a multi-channel DVD, the System converts
the signals into 2 channels.
OFF:
To cancel the screen saver.
Downmix setting is effective for the speaker output (and
digital audio output if “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” is set
to “PCM ONLY”) from this System.
FILE TYPE
If both audio tracks (MP3 or WMA files) and still picture
(JPEG files) are recorded on a disc, you can select which to
play.
Select one of the following:
DOLBY
SURROUND: Pro Logic decoder.
STEREO: To connect a conventional stereo
amplifier, receiver, MD player, TV, etc.
To connect an amplifier with the Dolby
Select one of the following:
AUDIO:
To play MP3/WMA files.
STILL PICTURE: To play JPEG files.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. RANGE COMPRESSION
ON SCREEN GUIDE
You can activate or deactivate the on-screen guide icons (see
page 13).
• When recording the picture on a VCR, select “OFF” to
avoid recording the guide icons on your video tape.
You can compress the dynamic range (the difference
between the loudest sound and the softest sound) to enjoy a
powerful sound even at a low volume level when listening to
Dolby Digital software. This is useful at night.
• The effectiveness varies depends on software.
Select one of the following:
Select one of the following:
ON:
To activate the on-screen guide icons.
To cancel the on-screen guide icons.
AUTO: To enjoy powerful sounds with full dynamic
OFF:
range.
ON:
Best for watching a movie at a low volume level.
AV COMPULINK MODE
When connecting the System to a JVC’s TV with the AV
COMPU LINK remote control system, select the proper
setting.
OTHERS Setup Menu
You can change some other convenient functions.
Select one of the following:
DVD1: To connect to the VIDEO-3 Input jacks on the
OTHERS
TV.
RESUME
ON
ON
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
DVD2: To connect to the VIDEO-1 Input jacks on the
DVD1
TV.
DVD3: To connect to the VIDEO-2 Input jacks on the
TV.
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control
system” on page 6.
RESUME
PARENTAL LOCK
You can activate or deactivate Resume for disc playback
Select this to enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
See the section that follows.
(see page 13).
Select one of the following:
ON:
To activate Resume.
To cancel Resume.
OFF:
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Select “COUNTRY CODE,” then display the pop-up
Restricting the Review
window.
Remote
ONLY
—Parental Lock
PARENTAL LOCK
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
S
PY
ENTER
QA
O
RE
_
You can restrict playback of DVD Video containing violent
scenes and those unsuitable for your family members. Once
you have set the rating level, such violent scenes (for which
a higher level than you set is assigned) may be skipped or
changed to another scene (depending on how the disc is
programmed).
RO
RU
RW
SA
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
6 Select the country code of your area.
• See “Country/Area Codes List” on page 44 to find your
country code.
To set Parental Lock
Set the rating level—Level 1 (most restrictive) to Level 8
(least restrictive).
ENTER
1 Display the Setup Menu.
LANGUAGE
MENU
SET UP
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
The System automatically enters “SET LEVEL” mode.
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
7 Make sure “SET LEVEL” is selected, then display the
SELECT
USE
pop-up window.
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
ENTER
ENTER
PARENTAL LOCK
(at the same time)
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
S
NONE
8
N
7
6
_
5
4
3
2 Select the OTHERS Setup Menus.
OTHERS
RESUME
ON
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
ON
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
DVD1
8 Set the rating level (NONE, 8 – 1).
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
ENTER
3 Select “PARENTAL LOCK.”
OTHERS
RESUME
ON
ON
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
DVD1
The System automatically enters “PASSWORD” entry
mode.
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
9 Make sure “PASSWORD” is selected, then enter any
4-digit number for your password.
4 Enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
ENTER
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
PARENTAL LOCK
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
SA
ENTER
NONE
_
_
_
_
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
10 Finish the setting.
ENTER
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the setting
To release Parental Lock temporarily
When you set a strict rating level, some discs may not be
played back at all. When you try to play such a disc, the
following screen appears on the TV.
1 Display the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
• Follow steps 1 to 4 of “To set Parental Lock.”
PARENTAL LOCK
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
SA
4
PARENTAL LOCK
TEMPORARY RELEASE
NOT RELEASE
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
PASSWORD
SELECT
ENTER
PASSWORD? ••• PRESS
0
~
9
KEYS
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
“PASSWORD” is automatically selected.
• You cannot select any item other than “EXIT” until you
enter the correct password.
SELECT
ENTER
USE 5∞ TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM.
2 Enter your password.
1 Select “TEMPORARY RELEASE,” then ENTER.
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
“PASSWORD” is
ENTER
automatically selected.
ENTER
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
• If you enter a wrong password, “– – – –” appears again.
If you missed three times, “EXIT” is automatically
selected. In this case, press ENTER to exit from the
PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
• If you do not play back such a disc, select “NOT
RELEASE,” then ENTER. Then eject the disc.
2 Enter your password.
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
• If you forget your password, enter “8888.”
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
3 Change the settings.
ENTER
• Follow steps 5 to 8 of “To set Parental Lock.”
4 Enter your password again (after selecting
REV. MODE
FM MODE
“PASSWORD” manually if necessary).
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ENTER
• If you enter a wrong password three times, “NOT
RELEASE” is automatically selected. In this case, press
ENTER. Then eject the disc.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
• If you want to change a password, enter a new four digit
number in this step.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Information
• When using an 8 cm disc, place it on the inner circle of the disc
tray.
Learning More about This System
•
On some DVD, SVCD, or VCD discs, the actual operations
may be different from what is explained in this manual, due to
the programming and disc structure; such differences are not a
malfunction of this System.
Getting Started (see pages 3 to 6)
Changing the Scanning Mode
• To enjoy the progressive video picture, connect a TV with the
progressive video input using component video cord.
• Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When
you play back such a disc, “LR ONLY” appears on the display
and the System plays back the left front and right front signals.
• 3D Phonic setting is also applied to the optical digital output
signals through the DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal.
• When using Resume on SVCD or VCD with PBC, the
playback might start on a position slightly different from
where you have stopped.
Before Operating the System (see pages 7 to 9)
Playable Disc Types:
• If you play back an NTSC disc with this setting set to “PAL,”
you can watch the playback pictures (the disc will be
reproduced using “PAL 60” format), but the TV screen may
roll over upward and downward rapidly.
• If you play back a PAL disc with this setting set to “NTSC,”
you can watch the playback pictures, but the following
symptoms may occur:
• You can use Resume only for the DVD/SVCD/VCD except
for some discs—depending how the disc is programmed.
– The items on the disc menu will be blurred, and be shown
slightly shifted when highlighted.
– The aspect ratio of the picture may differ from the original
aspect ratio.
Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments
(see pages 15 to 17)
Adjusting the Volume:
• Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting
the headphones.
– The picture movement is not smooth.
Daily Operations—Playback (see pages 10 to 14)
Listening to the Radio:
Adjusting the Sound:
• This function also affects the sound through the headphones.
• If you store a new station into an occupied preset number, the
previously stored station in that number will be erased.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the preset stations will be erased in a few days. If this
happens, preset the stations again.
Setting the Clock:
• “0:00” will flash on the display until you set the clock.
• The clock may gain or lose 1 to 2 minutes per month. If this
happens, reset the clock.
Unique DVD/VCD Operations (see pages 18 to 20)
Playing Back a Tape:
• During slow-motion playback, no sound will be reproduced.
• While zoomed in, the picture may look coarse.
• It is not recommended to use the C-120 or longer tapes. These
tapes easily jams in the pinch rollers and the capstans, and may
cause characteristic deterioration.
Advanced Disc Operations (see pages 21 to 23)
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play:
• If you try to program a 100th track, “MEM FULL” appears on
the display.
Playing Back a Disc:
• For MP3/WMA playback...
– This System cannot play “packet write” discs.
– MP3/WMA discs are required a longer readout time than
regular CDs. (It depends on the complexity of the group/file
configuration.)
– Some MP3/WMA files cannot be played back and will be
skipped. This result from their recording processes and
conditions.
• While programming steps...
Your entry will be ignored if you have tried to program an item
number that does not exist on the disc (for example, selecting
track 14 on a disc that only has 12 tracks).
Playing at Random—Random Play:
– When making MP3/WMA discs, use ISO 9660 Level 1 or
Level 2 for the disc format.
– This System can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the letter
case—upper/lower).
• The 4 button does not work for skipping chapters or tracks,
but only work for going back to the beginning of the current
chapter or track.
– It is recommended that you make each MP3 file at a
sampling rate of 44.1 kHz and at bit rate of 128 kbps. This
System cannot play back files made at bit rate of less than 64
kbps.
– This System can recognize the total of 1000 tracks and of 99
groups (each group can contain up to 150 tracks). Those
exceeding the maximum number cannot be recognized.
– Playback order of MP3/WMA tracks may be different from
the one you have intended while recording (see page 40). If
a folder does not include MP3/WMA tracks, they are
ignored.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On-Screen Disc Operations (see pages 24 to 28)
• For JPEG files playback...
– It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480
resolution. (If a file has been recorded at a resolution of
more than 640 x 480, it will take a long time to be shown.)
– This System can play only baseline JPEG files. Progressive
JPEG files or lossless JPEG files cannot be played.
Timer Operations (see pages 31 to 32)
• When using an external component—“AUX” for the playback
source, set the timer built in the component at the same time.
• Before turning off the power, do not forget to prepare the
required materials—a disc or tape for playback and a
recordable tape for recording.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the timer will be canceled. You need to set the clock
first, then the timer again.
• Without stopping the recording, you cannot change the source
after Recording Timer start recording.
• If you set the Sleep Timer after Daily Timer starts playing the
selected source, Daily Timer is canceled.
• If you set the Sleep Timer after Recording Timer starts
recording, Recording Timer is canceled, but recording
continues until Sleep Timer shuts off the power.
Baseline JPEG format:
Used for digital cameras, web,
etc.
Progressive JPEG format: Used for web.
Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely used
now.
– This System may not play back JPEG files properly which
are recorded by the devices other than digital still camera.
– If progressive or lossless JPEG files are played back, a black
screen appears. In this case, stop playback and select a
baseline JPEG file. Note that it may take a long time to
select another file.
Setup Menu Operations (see pages 33 to 38)
LANGUAGE:
Advanced Tape Operations (see pages 29 to 30)
Recording on a Tape:
• The recording level is automatically set correctly. Thus, you
can adjust the sound you are actually listening to without
affecting the recording level.
• When the language you have selected for “MENU
LANGUAGE,” “AUDIO LANGUAGE,” or “SUBTITLE” is
not recorded on a disc, the original language is used as the
initial language.
PICTURE—MONITOR TYPE:
• There is leader tape which cannot be recorded onto at the start
and end of cassette tapes. Thus, when recording CDs or radio
broadcasts, wind the leader tape first to ensure that the
recording will be made without any music part lost.
• If you start recording with no cassette inserted, “NO TAPE”
appears on the display. If a protected tape has been inserted,
“NO REC” appears.
• When using Reverse Mode for recording, start recording in the
forward (3) direction first; otherwise, recording will stop
when only one side (reverse) of the tape is recorded.
• Even if “4:3 PS” is selected, the screen size may become 4:3
letter box with some DVD Video discs. This depends on how
the discs are recorded.
• When you select “16:9” for a picture whose aspect ratio is 4:3,
the picture slightly changes due to the process for converting
the picture width.
AUDIO—DOWN MIX:
• This setting is not effective when DTS multi-channel software
is played back.
OTHERS—ON SCREEN GUIDE:
• You can also change Reverse Mode setting (
after starting recording.
and
)
• Setup Menus and on-screen bar will be displayed (and
recorded) even though this function is set to “OFF.”
Subtitles and the information for zooming in always appear on
the display regardless of this setting.
• You cannot open or close the disc tray while recording.
Synchronized Disc Recording:
• When the tape reaches its end in the forward direction (3)
during recording with Reverse Mode set to
, the last tune
will be re-recorded at the beginning of the reverse side.
MP3/WMA/JPEG groups/tracks configuration
This System plays back the tracks as follows.
Hierarchy
Level 1
ROOT
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
9
01
03
04
10
3
7
02
4
5
6
8
11
12
05
1
2
Group with its play order
Track with its play order
01
1
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the System
Maintenance
To get the best performance of the System, keep your discs,
tapes, and mechanism clean.
• Stains should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the System is
heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-diluted
neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean with a dry
cloth.
• Since the System may deteriorate in quality, become damaged
or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the following:
– DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.
Handling discs
• When removing the disc from its case, hold it at the edge while
pressing the center hole lightly.
– DO NOT wipe it strongly.
– DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.
– DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as insecticides
to it.
• DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact for
a long time.
• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc.
• Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping.
• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc.
• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, temperature extremes, and
moisture.
To clean the disc:
Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to
edge.
Handling cassette tapes
• If the tape is loose in its cassette, take up the slack by inserting
a pencil in one of the reels and rotate it.
– If the tape is loose, it may get stretched, cut, or caught in the
cassette.
• Be careful not to touch the tape surface.
• Avoid the following places to store the tape—in dusty places,
in direct sunlight or heat, in moist areas, on a TV or speaker,
or near a magnet.
To keep the best recording and playback sound quality
• Use a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to clean the heads,
capstans, and pinch rollers.
• Use a head demagnetizer (available at electronics and audio
shops) to demagnetize the heads (when the System turned off).
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MP3/WMA or JPEG tracks are not played back.
] The inserted disc may include both type of tracks (MP3/
WMA files and JPEG files). In this case, you can only play
back the files selected by the “FILE TYPE” setting (see
page 35).
Troubleshooting
If you are having a problem with your System, check this list
for a possible solution before calling for service.
] You have changed the “FILE TYPE” setting after you
inserted a disc. In this case, reload the disc.
General:
Adjustments or settings are suddenly canceled before
“NO AUDIO” appears.
] This System cannot play back illegally produced DVD
Audio discs.
you finish.
] There is a time limit. Repeat the procedure again.
Operations are disabled.
“LR ONLY” appears.
] The built-in microprocessor may malfunction due to
external electrical interference. Unplug the AC power cord
and then plug it back in.
] Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When
you play back such a disc, this System plays back the left
front and right front signals only.
Unable to operate the System from the remote control.
] The path between the remote control and the remote sensor
on the System is blocked.
The disc sound is discontinuous.
] The disc is scratched or dirty.
] The batteries are exhausted.
The disc tray does not open or close.
] The AC power cord is not plugged in.
] Child Lock is in use (see page 23).
No sound is heard.
] Speaker connections are incorrect or loose.
] Headphones are connected.
Tape Operations:
The cassette holder cannot be opened.
] Power supply from the AC power cord has been cut off
while the tape was running. Turn on the System.
No picture appears on the screen.
] The video cord connections are incorrect or loose.
No picture is displayed on the TV, the picture is blurred,
or the picture is divided into two parts.
] The System is connected to a TV which does not support
progressive scanning.
Recordings:
Impossible to record.
The left and right edges of the picture are missing on the
screen.
] Small tabs on the back of the cassette are removed. Cover
the holes with adhesive tape.
] Select “4:3 LB” for “MONITOR TYPE” (see page 34).
Timer Operations:
Daily Timer and Recording Timer do not work.
] The System has been turned on when the on-time comes.
Timer starts working only when the System is turned off.
Radio Operations:
Hard to listen to broadcasts because of noise.
] Antennas connections are incorrect or loose.
] The AM loop antenna is too close to the System.
] The FM antenna is not properly extended and positioned.
Daily Timer does not start playback.
] The disc loaded is a DVD video. Change the disc.
] Title/group number and chapter/track number are not
entered while setting the Daily Timer. Do not skip these
steps when you want to play a disc using Daily Timer.
Disc Operations:
The disc does not play.
] The disc is placed upside down. Place the disc with the label
Setup Menu Operations:
side up.
No subtitle appears on the display though you have
selected the initial subtitle language.
] Some DVDs are programmed to always display no subtitle
initially. If this happens, select the subtitle after starting play
(see page 18).
ID3 Tag on an MP3/WMA disc cannot be shown.
] There are two types of ID3 Tag—Version 1 and Version 2.
This System can only show ID3 Tag Version 1.
MP3/WMA/JPEG groups and tracks are not played
back as you expect.
] The playing order is determined when the disc was
recorded. It depends on the writing application.
Audio language is different from the one you have
selected as the initial audio language.
] Some DVDs are programmed to always use the original
language initially. If this happens, select the audio language
after starting play (see page 19).
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Code List
JW
KA
KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
Javanese
Georgian
Kazakh
SL
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
Afar
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Ameharic
Arabic
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean (KOR)
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati
Sesotho
Sundanese
Swedish
Swahili
Tamil
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
ST
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
SU
SV
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Maori
Telugu
Tajik
Bislama
Bengali, Bangla
Tibetan
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DA
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU
FA
FI
LV
MG
MI
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Breton
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
Catalan
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE
NL
NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Danish
Bhutani
Greek
Malay (MAY)
Maltese
TT
TW
UK
UR
UZ
VI
Twi
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque
Burmese
Nauru
Ukrainian
Urdu
Nepali
Uzbek
Persian
Dutch
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Wolof
Finnish
Norwegian
Occitan
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZU
FJ
Fiji
FO
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
Faroese
Frisian
(Afan) Oromo
Oriya
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu
Irish
Panjabi
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
PL
Polish
PS
Pashto, Pushto
Portuguese
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
PT
QU
RM
RN
RO
RU
RW
SA
Hindi
HR
HU
HY
IA
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Rumanian
Russian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
IE
SD
Sindhi
IK
SG
Sangho
IN
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Yiddish
SH
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
IS
SI
IW
JI
SK
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Country/Area Codes List
√
DK
DM
DO
DZ
EC
EE
EG
EH
ER
ES
Denmark
Dominica
Dominican Republic
Algeria
Ecuador
Estonia
Egypt
Western Sahara
Eritrea
Spain
JO
JP
Jordan
Japan
Kenya
Kyrgyzstan
Cambodia
AD
AE
AF
AG
AI
AL
AM
AN
AO
AQ
AR
AS
AT
AU
AW
AZ
BA
BB
BD
BE
BF
Andorra
United Arab Emirates
Afghanistan
Antigua and Barbuda
Anguilla
Albania
Armenia
Netherlands Antilles
Angola
Antarctica
Argentina
American Samoa
Austria
Australia
KE
KG
KH
KI
KM
KN
KP
Kiribati
Comoros
Saint Kitts and Nevis
Korea, Democratic People’s
Republic of
Korea, Republic of
Kuwait
Cayman Islands
Kazakhstan
Lao People’s Democratic
Republic
KR
KW
KY
KZ
LA
ET
FI
FJ
Ethiopia
Finland
Fiji
FK
FM
FO
FR
FX
GA
GB
GD
GE
GF
GH
GI
GL
GM
GN
GP
GQ
GR
GS
Falkland Islands (Malvinas)
Micronesia (Federated States of)
Faroe Islands
France
France, Metropolitan
Gabon
United Kingdom
Grenada
Georgia
French Guiana
Ghana
Gibraltar
Greenland
Gambia
Guinea
Guadeloupe
Equatorial Guinea
Greece
South Georgia and the South
Sandwich
Guatemala
Guam
Guinea-Bissau
Guyana
Hong Kong
Heard Island and McDonald
Islands
Honduras
Croatia
Haiti
Hungary
Indonesia
Ireland
Israel
India
British Indian Ocean Territory
Iraq
Iran (Islamic Republic of)
Iceland
Italy
Jamaica
Aruba
Azerbaijan
Bosnia and Herzegovina
Barbados
Bangladesh
Belgium
Burkina Faso
Bulgaria
Bahrain
Burundi
Benin
Bermuda
Brunei Darussalam
Bolivia
Brazil
Bahamas
Bhutan
Bouvet Island
Botswana
Belarus
Belize
Canada
Cocos (Keeling) Islands
Central African Republic
Congo
Switzerland
Côte d’Ivoire
Cook Islands
Chile
Cameroon
China
Colombia
Costa Rica
Cuba
Cape Verde
Christmas Island
Cyprus
Czech Republic
Germany
Djibouti
LB
LC
LI
LK
LR
LS
LT
LU
LV
LY
MA
MC
MD
MG
MH
ML
Lebanon
Saint Lucia
Liechtenstein
Sri Lanka
Liberia
Lesotho
Lithuania
Luxembourg
Latvia
Libyan Arab Jamahiriya
Morocco
Monaco
BG
BH
BI
BJ
BM
BN
BO
BR
BS
BT
BV
BW
BY
BZ
CA
CC
CF
CG
CH
CI
CK
CL
CM
CN
CO
CR
CU
CV
CX
CY
CZ
DE
DJ
Moldova, Republic of
Madagascar
Marshall Islands
Mali
MM Myanmar
MN
MO
MP
MQ
MR
MS
MT
MU
MV
Mongolia
Macau
GT
GU
GW
GY
HK
HM
Northern Mariana Islands
Martinique
Mauritania
Montserrat
Malta
HN
HR
HT
HU
ID
IE
IL
IN
IO
IQ
IR
IS
IT
Mauritius
Maldives
MW Malawi
MX
MY
MZ
NA
NC
NE
NF
NG
NI
Mexico
Malaysia
Mozambique
Namibia
New Caledonia
Niger
Norfolk Island
Nigeria
Nicaragua
Netherlands
Norway
NL
NO
JM
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NP
NR
NU
NZ
OM
PA
PE
PF
PG
PH
PK
PL
PM
PN
PR
PT
PW
PY
QA
RE
RO
RU
RW
SA
SB
Nepal
Nauru
Niue
New Zealand
Oman
Panama
Peru
French Polynesia
Papua New Guinea
Philippines
Pakistan
Poland
Saint Pierre and Miquelon
Pitcairn
Puerto Rico
Portugal
Palau
Paraguay
Qatar
Réunion
Romania
SE
SG
SH
SI
Sweden
Singapore
Saint Helena
Slovenia
Svalbard and Jan Mayen
Slovakia
Sierra Leone
San Marino
Senegal
Somalia
Suriname
Sao Tome and Principe
El Salvador
Syrian Arab Republic
Swaziland
Turks and Caicos Islands
Chad
French Southern Territories
Togo
Thailand
Tajikistan
Tokelau
Turkmenistan
Tunisia
Tonga
TT
Trinidad and Tobago
Tuvalu
Taiwan
Tanzania, United Republic of
Ukraine
Uganda
United States Minor Outlying
Islands
United States
Uruguay
TV
TW
TZ
UA
UG
UM
SJ
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SR
ST
SV
SY
SZ
TC
TD
TF
TG
TH
TJ
US
UY
UZ
VA
VC
VE
VG
VI
VN
VU
WF
WS
YE
YT
YU
ZA
ZM
ZR
ZW
Uzbekistan
Vatican City State (Holy See)
Saint Vincent and the Grenadines
Venezuela
Virgin Islands (British)
Virgin Islands (U.S.)
Vietnam
Vanuatu
Wallis and Futuna Islands
Samoa
Yemen
Mayotte
Yugoslavia
South Africa
Russian Federation
Rwanda
Saudi Arabia
Solomon Islands
Seychelles
Sudan
TK
TM
TN
TO
TP
TR
Zambia
Zaire
Zimbabwe
SC
SD
East Timor
Turkey
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals
DIGITAL AUDIO
OUTPUT
Output Signals
Playback disc
DVD Video
STREAM/PCM
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
PCM ONLY
with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Linear PCM
with 96 kHz, Linear PCM
with Dolby Digital
with DTS
Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
DVD Audio
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with 48/96/192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit Linear PCM
with 44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz,
16/20/24 bit Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with Dolby Digital
with DTS
Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
SVCD, VCD, CD
CD with DTS
DTS bitstream
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
MP3/WMA disc
32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
*While playing some DVDs, digital signals may be emitted at 20 bits or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DVD
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal if the discs are not copy-protected.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Parts Index
Refer to the pages to see how to use the buttons and controls.
Amplifier section
Output Power:
40 W (20 W + 20 W) at 4 Ω (10% THD)
AUX: 400 mV/50 kΩ
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT:
Remote control
Audio Input
Digital output:
–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm 30 nm)
STANDBY/ON
Video output:
Color system:
VIDEO (composite):
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
1
ZOOM
4
2
DVD LEVEL
5
3
VFP
6
NTSC/PAL selectable
10
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
4 Ω – 16 Ω
17
11, 12, 14,
16, 18–21,
26, 37
CLOCK/
TIMER
REV. MODE
FM MODE
S-VIDEO: Y (luminance)
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
17, 31
C (chrominance, burst)
COMPONENT: (Y)
(PB/PR)
Speakers/Impedance:
SET
10
10
TOP MENU
MENU
SET UP
ENTER
14, 20,
25–31, 33
ON SCREEN
CANCEL
RETURN
Tuner section
FM tuning range:
DVD/CD
TAPE
10, 13, 22, 28
87.50 MHz – 108.00 MHz
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
PLAY
MODE
11, 13,
AM (MW) tuning range:
20–23, 28
531 kHz – 1 602 kHz (at 9 kHz intervals)
530 kHz – 1 600 kHz (at 10 kHz intervals)
+
GROUP/TITLE
SLOW – SLOW
BASS/
3D
15
15
DISPLAY
RHYTHM AX
PHONIC TREBLE
9, 17
14
Tape section
DIMMER
Frequency response:
Wow and flutter:
60 Hz – 14 000 Hz
0.15% (WRMS)
FADE
MUTING
10, 15
16
11, 16–20,
VOLUME
23
RM-SUXP450U REMOTE CONTROL
Disc player section
Playable disc: DVD Video/DVD Audio
CD/VCD/SVCD
15
20
CD-R/CD-RW (CD/SVCD/VCD/MP3/
WMA/JPEG format)
DVD-R/DVD-RW (Video format)
Dynamic range:
Main unit
90 dB
500 lines
Horizontal resolution:
Wow and flutter:
Immeasurable
12
Speakers
Speaker units:
Impedance:
Full-range:
10 cm cone x 1
4 Ω
Dimensions (approx.):
145 mm x 230 mm x 191 mm
(W/H/D)
8
Mass (approx.):
1.8 kg each
14
15
Remote
sensor
Supplied Accessories
See page 3.
STANDBY/ON
DVD/CD
3D
PHONIC
RHYTHM AX
AUX
10, 11
VOLUME
General
TAPE
FM/AM
10, 15
10–13,
22, 28
Power requirement:AC 110 V/AC 127 V/AC 220 V/
AC 230 V – AC 240 V
(adjustable
with the voltage selector), 50 Hz/60 Hz
65 W (at operation)
REC
DOWN
UP
30
Power consumption:
13, 23
10
4.1 W (on standby)
170 mm x 230 mm x 311 mm
11, 13
Dimensions (approx.):
Mass (approx.):
PHONES
(W/H/D)
4.8 kg
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mains (AC) Line Instruction (not applicable for Europe, U.S.A., Canada,
Australia, and U.K.)
P U S H O P E N
E
S
R
E
V
E
R
O
T
A U
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
SELECT
PA
L
NTSC
Y
PB
PR
CAUTION for mains (AC) line
BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your mains (AC) line voltage corresponds with the position of the voltage selector
switch provided on the outside of this equipment and, if different, reset the voltage selector switch, to prevent from a
damage or risk of fire/electric shock.
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
EN, AR, PE
0604AIMMDWJEM
© 2004 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
中
文
MICRO COMPONENT SYSTEM
微型組合音響
UX-P450
—Consists of CA-UXP450 and SP-UXP450
由
及
組成
SP-UXP450
—
CA-UXP450
SUPER VIDEO
INSTRUCTIONS
使用說明書
GVT0129-013A
[UB]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
警告，注意及其他須知事項
Warnings, Cautions and Others/
CAUTION—STANDBY/ON
button!
注意
開關 !
— STANDBY/ON
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely
(all lamps and indications go off). The STANDBY/ON
button in any position does not disconnect the mains line.
• When the unit is on standby, the STANDBY/ON lamp lights
in red.
• When the unit is turned on, the STANDBY/ON lamp lights
in green.
無論 STANDBY/ON
沒有被切斷，若要將電源完全關閉，應把電源插頭拔离插座
（所有的燈和信息均熄滅）。
開關在任何位置，電源線的電源還是
•
•
STANDBY/ON
當主機正處于備用狀態，
當主機開啟后，
燈為紅色。
燈為綠色。
STANDBY/ON
電源開關可用遙控器控制。
The power can be remote controlled.
注意
為了減少触電，火災等危險：
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.
1.
2.
切勿擅自卸下螺絲釘，蓋子或機殼。
切勿讓本機受雨淋或置潮濕環境中。
CAUTION
注意
•
Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a
newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get
out.)
Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted
candles, on the apparatus.
When discarding batteries, environmental problems must
be considered and local rules or laws governing the
disposal of these batteries must be followed strictly.
Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping
or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such
as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
•
切勿堵塞通風口或通風孔。
( 如果通風口或通風孔被報紙或布等堵塞，熱量將無法散
出。)
•
•
切勿在本設備上放置任何裸露的火源，如點燃的蜡燭。
•
• 處理廢棄電池時，必須考慮環境問題，并嚴格遵守當地關
于處理廢棄電池的有關法律或規定。
• 切勿將本裝置暴露于雨水所及，潮濕，滴水或濺起水花的
地方，亦不要將任何裝滿液体的物件 ( 如花瓶 ) 放置在本
裝置上。
•
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
鐳射產品的重要說明
一級鐳射產品。
1.
2.
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user
serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open
and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to
beam.
注意：切勿打開頂蓋板。本机內部沒有用戶可自行維修的部
件；所有維修工作應由有資格的人員完成。
注意：當內部鎖定裝置失效或者損坏后，打開蓋板可能會產
生可見或不可見的鐳射輻射。應避免受到鐳射光束的直接照
射。
3.
4.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED
INSIDE THE UNIT.
標簽的復制標示：注意標簽位于機內。
Caution: Proper Ventilation
注意 : 正确通風
為免發生触電和火警的危險，及防止本機受損，請將本機如下
放置：
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire, and to prevent
damage, locate the apparatus as follows:
1. Front: No obstructions and open spacing.
2. Sides/ Top/ Back: No obstructions should be placed in the
areas shown by the dimensions below.
3. Bottom: Place on the level surface. Maintain an adequate
air path for ventilation by placing on a stand with a height of
10 cm or more.
1. 前面：沒有障礙物及地方開闊。
2.
側面 / 頂面 / 背面：在圖中所示范圍中，不應放置任何障礙
物。
3.
10
底部：放置在水平面上。放置在一個高
上，以保証足夠的通風道。
厘米或以上的臺
15 cm
15
15 cm
15
1 cm
1
1 cm
1
15 cm
15
15 cm
15
15 cm
15
10 cm
10
SP-UXP450
CA-UXP450 SP-UXP450
CA-UXP450
G-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Introduction .....................................................2 On-Screen Disc Operations .......................... 24
Precautions ......................................................................2
How to Read This Manual...............................................2
On-screen Bar Information............................................24
Operations Using the On-screen Bar.............................25
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures.................................27
Operations on the CONTROL Screen...........................27
Getting Started.................................................3
Step 1: Unpack ................................................................3
Step 2: Prepare the Remote Control ................................3
Step 3: Hook Up ..............................................................4
Setting the Video Output Selector...................................6
Changing the Scanning Mode .........................................6
Advanced Tape Operations.......................... 29
Recording on a Tape......................................................29
Synchronized Disc Recording.......................................30
Timer Operations.......................................... 31
Before Operating the System..........................7
Playable Disc Types ........................................................7
Display Indicators............................................................8
Setting the Timer...........................................................31
Setup Menu Operations................................ 33
Operating Procedure......................................................33
Restricting the Review—Parental Lock........................37
Daily Operations—Playback ........................10
Listening to the Radio ...................................................11
Playing Back a Tape......................................................12
Playing Back a Disc.......................................................12
Additional Information................................. 39
Learning More about This System ................................39
Maintenance ..................................................................41
Troubleshooting.............................................................42
Language Code List.......................................................43
Country/Area Codes List...............................................44
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals .....................45
Specifications ................................................................46
Parts Index.....................................................................46
Daily Operations—Sound & Other
Adjustments ...................................................15
Adjusting the Volume....................................................15
Adjusting the Sound ......................................................15
Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound
Increase Level............................................................16
Changing the Display Brightness ..................................16
Changing the Picture Tone ............................................16
Setting the Clock ...........................................................17
Turning Off the Power Automatically...........................17
Unique DVD/VCD Operations .....................18
Selecting the View Angle..............................................18
Selecting the Subtitle Language ....................................18
Selecting the Audio Track.............................................19
Playing Back a Bonus Group ........................................19
Special Effect Playback.................................................20
Advanced Disc Operations............................21
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play..........21
Playing at Random—Random Play...............................22
Playing Repeatedly........................................................23
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock ........................23
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Precautions
How to Read This Manual
To make this manual as simple and easy-to-understand as
possible, we have adapted the following methods:
• Button and control operations are explained as listed in the
table below.
Installation
• Install in a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor
too cold—between 5°C and 35°C.
• Install the System in a location with adequate ventilation to
prevent internal heat buildup inside the System.
•
Some related tips and notes are explained later in the
sections “Additional Information” and
“Troubleshooting,” but not in the same section
explaining the operations. If you want to know more
about the functions, or if you have a doubt about the
functions, go to these sections and you will find the
answers.
DO NOT install the System in a location near
heat sources, or in a place subject to direct
sunlight, excessive dust or vibration.
• Leave sufficient distance between the System and the TV.
• Keep the speakers away from the TV to avoid interference
with TV.
Indicates that you press the button
briefly
.
Power sources
• When unplugging the System from the wall outlet, always
pull on the plug, not the AC power cord.
Indicates that you press the button
briefly and repeatedly until an
option you want is selected.
DO NOT handle the AC power cord with wet
hands.
Indicates that you press one of the
buttons.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lenses inside the System in
the following cases:
• After starting to heat the room
• In a damp room
• If the System is brought directly from a cold to a warm
place
Indicates that you press and hold the
button for specified seconds.
• The number inside the arrow
indicates the period of press (in this
example, 2 seconds).
2 sec.
• If no number is inside the arrow,
press and hold until the entire
procedure is complete or until you
get a result you want.
Should this occur, the System may malfunction. In this case,
leave the System turned on for a few hours until the moisture
evaporates, unplug the AC power cord, then plug it in again.
Others
Indicates that you turn the control
toward the specified direction(s).
• Should any metallic object or liquid fall into the System,
unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer before
operating any further.
DO NOT disassemble the System since there
are no user serviceable parts inside.
Indicates that this operation is only
possible using the remote control.
Remote
ONLY
• If you are not going to operate the System for an extended
period of time, unplug the AC power cord from the wall
outlet.
Indicates that this operation is only
possible using the buttons and controls on
the main unit.
Main Unit
ONLY
If anything goes wrong, unplug the AC power cord and
consult your dealer.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Step 1: Unpack
After unpacking, check to be sure that you have all the
following items. The number in parentheses indicates the
quantity of each piece supplied.
• FM antenna (1)
Step 1:Unpack the package and
check the accessories.
• AM loop antenna (1)
• Composite video cord (1)
• Remote control (1)
• Batteries (2))
If any item is missing, consult your dealer immediately.
Step 2: Prepare the Remote Control
Insert the batteries into the remote control by matching the
polarity (+ and –) correctly.
1
Step 2:Prepare the remote control.
R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F)
2
Step 3:Hook up the components such
as AM/FM antennas, speakers,
etc. (see pages 4 to 6).
3
• DO NOT use an old battery together with a
new one.
• DO NOT use different types of batteries
together.
• DO NOT expose batteries to heat or flame.
• DO NOT leave the batteries in the battery
compartment when you are not going to use
the remote control for an extended period of
time. Otherwise, the remote control will be
damaged from battery leakage.
Finally plug the AC power cord.
Now you can operate the System.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step 3: Hook Up
If you need more detailed information, see page 6.
Illustrations of the input/output terminals below are typical
examples.
When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals
since the terminal names actually printed on the rear may vary.
Before connecting optical digital
cord
Remove the protective
cap from the DVD
OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUT terminal.
Turn the power off to all components before connections.
For better FM/AM reception
AM loop antenna
Keep it connected.
Outdoor FM
antenna
(not supplied)
Vinyl-covered wire (not supplied)
Extend it horizontally.
Disconnect the supplied FM antenna, and connect to an outdoor FM
antenna using a 75 Ω wire with coaxial type connector.
VIDEO INPUT
VIDEO INPUT
Yellow
Composite video cord (supplied)
OR
S-video cord (not supplied)
OR
TV
VIDEO INPUT
Y
Green
Blue
P
B
PR
Red
Component video cord (not supplied)
AV COMPU LINK cord (not supplied)
(cord with monaural mini plug)
AV
COMPU LINK
• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control
system” on page 6.
OPTICAL
DIGITAL IN
DECODER
Optical digital cord (not supplied)
AUDIO OUT
White
LEFT
RIGHT
AUX
Red
Audio cord (not supplied)
VCR, etc.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Turn it until the best reception is
obtained.
FM antenna (supplied)
Extend it so that you can obtain
the best reception.
P U S H O P E N
R E V E R S E
O
T
U
A
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
SELECT
PA
L
NTSC
Y
PB
PR
To a wall outlet
Plug the AC power cord only after all connections and
selector settings on the rear are complete.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To connect the AM loop antenna
IMPORTANT
The speakers are magnetically shielded to avoid color
distortions on TVs. However, if not installed properly, it
may cause color distortions. So, pay attention to the
following when installing the speakers.
1 Hold
• When placing the speakers near a TV set, turn off the
TV’s main power switch or unplug it before installing the
speakers. Then wait at least 30 minutes before turning on
the TV’s main power switch again.
3 Release
Some TVs may still be affected even though you have
followed the above. If this happens, move the speakers
away from the TV.
2 Insert
• If the AM loop antenna wire or speaker cords are covered
with vinyl, remove the vinyl to expose the tip of the
antenna by twisting the vinyl.
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other
terminals, connecting cords and power cord.Also, keep the
antennas away from metallic parts of the System,
connecting cords, and theAC power cord. This could cause
poor reception.
AV COMPU LINK remote control system
This system allows you to use JVC’s TV with simple
operations; by starting playing back a disc, the TV
automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the
appropriate position so that you can view the playback
picture.
• To use AV COMPU LINK, you need to connect the
System and the TV by using a cord with monaural mini-
plugs (not supplied) in addition to the video input/output
connection through the COMPONENT jacks, S-VIDEO
jack or VIDEO (composite) jack on the rear.
To connect the speaker cords
Connect the right speaker to the RIGHT terminals, and the
left speaker to the LEFT terminals.
1 Hold
Setting the Video Output Selector
You can select the video output to match it to the color
system of your TV.
3 Release
NTSC: For an NTSC TV.
PAL: For a PAL TV.
2 Insert
VIDEO
OUT
SELECT
• When using a multi-color system
TV, either position will work.
• When connecting the speaker cords, match the polarity of
the speaker terminals: Red cord to (+) and black cord
to (–).
PAL
NTSC
Remote
ONLY
Changing the Scanning Mode
This System supports progressive scanning.
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to
each terminal.
• DO NOT allow the conductor of the speaker
cords to be in touch with the metallic parts of
the System.
If you connect a progressive TV through the COMPONENT
jacks, you can enjoy a high quality picture from the built-in
DVD player by selecting “PROGRE.”
PROGRESSIVE
PROGRE
0
INTER
(at the same time)
PROGRE Progressive scanning. For a progressive TV.
INTER
Interlaced scanning. For a conventional TV.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Operating the System
DVD Video—digital audio formats
The System can play back the following digital audio
Playable Disc Types
This unit has been designed to play back the following discs:
formats.
•
Linear PCM: Uncompressed digital audio, the same
format used for CDs and most studio masters.
Dolby Digital: Compressed digital audio, developed by
Dolby Laboratories, which enables multi-channel encode
to create the realistic surround sound.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems): Compressed digital
audio, developed by Digital Theater Systems, Inc., which
enables multi-channel like Dolby Digital. As the
compression ratio is lower than for Dolby Digital, it
provides wider dynamic range and better separation.
Region
Code*
Number
Video
Format
Disc Type
Mark (Logo)
•
DVD Video
DVD Audio
3
or
ALL
•
NTSC
or
PAL
Video CD
(VCD)
DIGITAL VIDEO
When playing a multi-channel encoded DVD, the System
properly converts these multi-channel signals into 2
channels, and emits the downmixed sound from the
speakers.
Super Video
CD (SVCD)
SUPER VIDEO
COMPACT
•
To enjoy the powerful sound of these multi-channel
encoded DVDs, connect a proper decoder or an amplifier
with a proper built-in decoder to the digital output terminal
on the rear.
Audio CD
DIGITAL AUDIO
CD-R
The System can play back CD-R or CD-RW
recorded in the Audio CD, Video CD, SVCD,
MP3, WMA, and JPEG formats.
CD-RW
DVD-R
The System can play back DVD-R or DVD-
RW recorded in the video format.
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “MLP Lossless”, and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• “DTS” and “DTS2.0+DIGITAL OUT” are registered
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents
and other intellectual property rights owned by
Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be authorized by
Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
DVD-RW
In addition to the above discs, this System can play back audio
data recorded on CD Text, CD-G (CD Graphics), and CD-Extra.
• The following discs cannot be played back:
DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD+R, DVD+RW, CD-I (CD-I
Ready), CD-ROM, Photo CD, etc.
Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage the
speakers.
• In this manual, “file” and “track” are interchangeably used
for MP3/WMA/JPEG operations.
* Note on Region Code
DVD players and DVDs have their own Region Code numbers.
CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH
DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY
COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY
CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE
PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 OR 625 PROGRESSIVE
SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED
THAT THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO
THE ‘STANDARD DEFINITION’ OUTPUT. IF THERE
ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR TV SET
COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p AND
625p DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR
CUSTOMER SERVICE CENTER.
This System can play back only DVDs recorded with the NTSC
or PAL color system whose Region Code numbers including
“3.”
EX.:
If a DVD with the improper Region Code numbers is loaded,
“RGN ERR (Region Code Error)” appears on the display and
playback will not start.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display Indicators
The indications on the display teach you a lot of things while you are operating the System.
Before operating the System, be familiar with when and how the indicator illuminates on the display.
1 2 3
4
5
6
7
SLEEP MONO ST MP3 WMA 3DPHONIC REC
123 REC
RANDOM
PRGM ALL BONUS B.S.P.
A.STANDBY
8
9
p
q
w
e
1 Rhythm Ax indicator
p BONUS indicator
• Lights when Rhythm Ax is activated.
• Lights when a DVD Audio with a bonus group is
2 Daily Timer indicators
detected.
•
: lights when Daily Timer stands by or is being preset.
q B.S.P. (Browsable Still Picture) indicator
• Lights when Browsable Still Pictures are detected while
playing a DVD Audio.
• 1/2/3: lights when a Daily Timer (1, 2, or 3) stands by;
flashes while setting or working.
• REC: lights when the Recording Timer stands by; flashes
while setting or working.
SLEEP indicator
w Main display
• While listening to radio: Band (or preset number) and
station frequency appear.
3
• Lights when the Sleep Timer is activated.
4 FM reception indicators
• While selecting “AUX”: “AUX” appears.
• While playing a tape: “TAPE” appears.
• While playing a disc: See “Indications on the main
display while operating a disc” on page 9.
e A(auto). STANDBY indicator
• Lights when Auto Standby is activated.
• Flashes when disc playback stops with Auto Standby
activated.
• MONO: lights while receiving an FM stereo station in
monaural.
• ST (stereo): lights while an FM stereo station with
sufficient signal strength is tuned in.
5 MP3/WMA indicators
• MP3: lights when an MP3 track is detected.
• WMA: lights when a WMA track is detected.
6 3D PHONIC indicator
• Lights when 3D Phonic is activated.
7 REC indicator
• Lights while recording.
8 Tape operation indicators
•
2 3 (tape direction):
–Lights to indicate the current tape running direction.
–Flashes slowly during playback and recording.
–Flashes quickly while rewinding a tape.
(reverse mode):
•
–
–
–
: tape play continues endlessly.
: tape automatically reverses once.
: tape play stops at the end of one side.
9Disc operation indicators
• RANDOM: lights when Random Play is activated.
• PRGM (program): lights when Program Play is activated.
•
(repeat)/ALL:
–
–
: lights when Disc Repeat is activated.
: lights when any Repeat other than the above is
ALL
activated.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indications on the main display while operating a disc
While playing back a disc:
While disc play is stopped:
• DVD Video:
• DVD Video:
Current chapter no.
Elapsed playing time
Total title no.
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current title and
chapter numbers for a few seconds.
• DVD Audio:
• DVD Audio:
Track no.
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time
Total group no.
Group no.
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group
and track numbers for a few seconds.
• Audio CD:
• Audio CD:
Current track no.
Total track no.
Total playing time
Elapsed playing time
• SVCD/VCD:
• SVCD/VCD:
Total track no.
Total playing time*
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time*
* Changes to “PBC” when stopping PBC playback.
* “PBC” appears while playing a disc with PBC.
• MP3/WMA:
• MP3/WMA:
Current track no.
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time
Current group no.
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group
and track numbers for a few seconds.
• JPEG:
• JPEG:
Current group no.
Current group no.
Current file no.
Current file no.
• If Resume is turned “ON” (see page 36), “RESUME” appears when you stop playback.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daily Operations—Playback
In this manual, the operation using the remote control
is mainly explained; however, you can use the buttons
and controls on the main unit if they have the same (or
similar) name and marks.
1
10 keys
1 Turn on the power.
The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit lights in
green.
SET
ENTER
TOP MENU
MENU
,
• Without pressing STANDBY/ON
, the System
,
,
turns on by pressing one of the source selecting
buttons in the next step.
RETURN
2
8
7
2 Select the source.
1/¡
3D PHONIC
Playback automatically starts if the selected source is
ready to start.
GROUP/TITLE
4/¢
• If you press AUX, start playback source on the
external component.
3
SHIFT
3 Adjust the volume.
4 Operate the target source as explained
later.
To turn off (stand by) the unit
STANDBY/ON
1
2
The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit
STANDBY/ON
lights in red.
• A small amount of power is always
consumed even while on standby.
For private listening
Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the
main unit. The sound will no longer come out of the
speakers. Be sure to turn down the volume before
connecting or putting the headphones.
• Disconnecting the headphones will activate the
speakers again.
DVD/CD
3
4
DO NOT turn off (stand by) the System with
the volume set to an extremely high level;
Otherwise, the sudden blast of sound can
damage your hearing, speakers and/or
headphones when you turn on the System or
start playback.
VOLUME
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To tune in to a station
While FM or AM is selected...
Listening to the Radio
Main Unit
ONLY
Remote control:
Main unit:
To set the AM tuner interval spacing
Before operating the tuner, it is required to select the
appropriate AM space interval used for your area.
2 sec.
2 sec.
GROUP/TITLE
DOWN
UP
1 Select the AM band.
FM
AM
Frequency starts changing on the display.
When a station (frequency) with sufficient signal strength is
tuned in, the frequency stops changing.
• When you repeatedly press the button, the frequency changes
step by step.
2 Turn off the power.
STANDBY/ON
To stop searching manually, press either button.
Remote
ONLY
If the received FM station is hard to listen
FM MODE
3 Select the appropriate AM space interval for your
9
area.
• You can only use the button and the control on the front
panel.
(at the same time)
STANDBY/ON
DOWN
The MONO indicator lights on the display. Reception will
improve though stereo effect is lost—Monaural reception
mode.
To restore the stereo effect, press the button again (the
MONO indicator goes off).
AM 9KHZ
(9 kHz interval)
While holding...
Remote
ONLY
To preset the stations
You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.
STANDBY/ON
UP
1 Tune in to a station you want to preset.
• You can also store the monaural reception mode for FM
preset stations if selected.
AM 10KHZ
(10 kHz interval)
2 Activate the preset number entry mode.
While holding...
SET
• Finish the following process while the indication on the
display is flashing.
To select the band (FM or AM)
FM
AM
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Select a preset number for the station you store.
To start:
To stop:
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
Examples:
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
To select preset number 5, press
5.
To select preset number 15,
press +10, then 5.
To select preset number 30,
press +10, +10, then 10.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
9
7
To rewind tape:
Before or after play...
GROUP/TITLE
10
10
Rewind the tape to the right.
Rewind the tape to the left.
• You can also use the ¡ or 1 buttons.
4 Store the station.
SET
To change the tape running direction
3 (forward play)
2 (reverse play)
Remote
ONLY
To tune in to a preset station
1 Select the band (FM or AM).
To reverse the tape automatically
FM
AM
REV. MODE
7
2 Select a preset number for the station you store.
(at the same time)
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
• You can also use the ¡ or
1 buttons.
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
Tape is played from the forward side to the
reverse side. When the reverse side is played
back, playback stops.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
9
7
Tape is automatically reversed, and playback
repeats until you stop it.
10
10
Tape will not be reversed. When the current
side of the tape reaches its end, playback stops.
Playing Back a Tape
Playing Back a Disc
To insert a tape
IMPORTANT: Before playing a disc, make sure of the
following...
• Turn on the TV and select an appropriate input mode on
the TV to view the pictures or on-screen displays on the
TV screen.
You can play back tapes of types I, II, and IV.
Push
Insert
Close
• For disc playback, you can change the initial setting to
your preference. See “Setup Menu Operations” on
page 33.
If “
” appears on the TV screen when you press a
With the tape side facing outside
button, the disc cannot accept the operation you have
tried to do, or data required for that operation is not
recorded on the disc.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before operating a disc, be familiar how a disc is recorded.
• DVD Video comprises of “Titles” which includes
On-screen guide icons
“
“
Chapters,” DVD Audio/MP3/WMA/JPEG comprise of
Groups” which includes “Tracks,” and CD/SVCD/VCD
• During DVD Video playback, the following icons may
appear on the TV:
comprise of only “Tracks.”
• For JPEG playback, see “Operations on the CONTROL
Screen” on page 27.
At the beginning of a scene containing multi-
angle views.
At the beginning of a scene containing multi-
audio sounds.
To insert a disc
You can insert a disc while playing another source.
At the beginning of a scene containing multi-
subtitles.
• The following icons will be also shown on the TV to
indicate your current operation.
,
,
,
,
,
To close the disc tray, press 0 again.
Remote
ONLY
• If you press DVD/CD 3, disc tray closes automatically
and playback starts (depending on how the disc is
programmed internally).
To select a title/group
While playing...
GROUP/TITLE
To start:
To pause:
To stop:
DVD/CD
(at the same time)
To release, press
DVD/CD 3.
• Group name appears for MP3/WMA discs.
•
While playing DVD/SVCD/VCD: This System can store
the stop point, and when you start playback again by
pressing DVD/CD 3 (even while on standby), it starts
from the position where you have stopped—Resume Play.
(“RESUME” appears on the display when you stop
playback.)
To select a chapter/track
While playing...
• First time you press 4, you
GROUP/TITLE
can go back to the beginning of
the current chapter/track.
To stop completely while Resume is activated, press 7
twice. (To cancel Resume, see “RESUME” on page 36.)
• When operating the System, the on-screen guide icon (see
the following table) appears on the TV.
To deactivate the on-screen guide icons, see “ON
SCREEN GUIDE” on page 36.
Remote
ONLY
To locate a particular portion
While playing a disc except MP3/WMA...
+
SLOW
SLOW
–
x2
x2
x10
x10
x20
x20
x60
x60
x5
x5
• No sound comes out while searching on DVD Video/
SVCD/VCD.
To return to normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 For SVCD/VCD with PBC:
Remote
ONLY
While playing a disc with PBC, “PBC” appears on the
display.
When disc menu appears on the TV, select an item on the
menu. Playback of the selected item starts.
To locate an item directly
You can select a title/chapter/track directly and start
playback.
• For DVD Video, you can select a title before starting
playback, while you can select a chapter after starting
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
Examples:
playback
.
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10,
then 5.
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
Examples:
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10,
then 5.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
8
9
7
REV. MODE
FM MODE
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
10
10
8
9
7
10
10
To move to the next or previous page of the current
menu:
GROUP/TITLE
To use 3D Phonic
While playing...
3D
Moves to the next page.
PHONIC
ACTION
OFF
DRAMA
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
Moves to the previous page.
THEATER
3D PHONIC
(Canceled)
To return to the previous menu:
• The selected mode can only be shown on the TV.
ACTION
Suitable for action movies and sports
programs.
CANCEL
RETURN
DRAMA
Creates natural and warm sound. Enjoy
movies in a relaxed mood.
THEATER Enjoy sound effects like in a major theater.
(at the same time)
Remote
ONLY
To cancel PBC
To play back using the disc menu
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
7 For DVD Video/DVD Audio:
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
1 Show the disc menu.
MENU
REV. MODE
FM MODE
TOP MENU
SET UP
8
9
7
Select a track.
10
10
Stop playback.
2 Select an item on the disc menu.
Playback starts with the selected track.
ENTER
To reactivate PBC, press 7 (twice if Resume is turned
“ON”), then press DVD/CD 3.
• With some discs, you can also select items by entering the
number using the 10 keys.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments
Adjusting the Volume
Remote control
You can adjust the volume level from level 0 (VOL MIN) to
level 40 (VOL MAX).
Remote control:
Main unit:
VOLUME
VFP
DVD LEVEL
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
CLOCK/
TIMER
VOLUME
SET
Remote
ONLY
,
,
,
To drop the volume in a moment
ENTER
To restore the volume, press again, or
adjust the volume level.
FADE
MUTING
BASS/TREBLE
RHYTHM AX
DISPLAY
DIMMER
SHIFT
VOLUME
+/–
Adjusting the Sound
FADE
To emphasize rhythm feeling—RHYTHM AX
This function emphasizes bass attack feeling, and also
changes the subwoofer level.
MUTING
RHYTHM AX
RHYTHMAX
OFF
(Canceled)
Main unit
To adjust the tone
You can adjust the bass and treble level from –5 to +5.
To adjust the bass
BASS/
TREBLE
TRE
BASS
Canceled
VOLUME
RHYTHM AX
VOLUME +/–
To adjust the treble
BASS/
TREBLE
TRE
BASS
Canceled
VOLUME
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound
Changing the Picture Tone
Remote
ONLY
While showing a playback picture on the TV, you can select
the preset picture tone, or adjust it and store your own taste.
Increase Level
The DVD Video sound is sometimes recorded at a lower
level than for other discs and sources. You can set the
increase level for the currently loaded DVD Video, so you
do not have to adjust the volume every time you change the
source.
To select a preset picture tone
1 While playing, display VFP setting screen.
NORMAL
GAMMA
0
0
0
0
0
0
VFP
BRIGHTNESS
CONTRAST
SATURATION
TINT
DVD LEVEL
6
NORMAL MIDDLE
5
HIGH
SHARPNESS
(at the same time)
On the TV
(at the same time)
2 Select a preset picture tone.
NORMAL Original recording level.
NORMAL
CINEMA
USER1
MIDDLE
HIGH
Output level is increased (less than “HIGH”).
USER2
Output level is increased (more than
“MIDDLE”).
NORMAL
CINEMA
Normally select this.
• Once the current DVD is ejected, this setting is canceled
and set automatically to “NORMAL.”
Suitable for a movie source.
USER1/USER2 You can adjust parameters and can
Remote
ONLY
store the settings (see below).
Changing the Display Brightness
You can dim the display window.
To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.
To adjust the picture tone
DIMMER
DIM2
DIM1
1 Select “USER1” or “USER2.”
AUTO DIM
DIM OFF
(Canceled)
• Follow steps 1 and 2 explained above.
2 Select a parameter you want to adjust.
DIM1
Dims the display.
ENTER
DIM2
Erases the display illumination.
AUTO DIM
Erases the display illumination when
disc playback starts.*
• The display illuminates when
playback stops.
GAMMA
Adjust if the neutral color is bright or
dark (–3 to +3).
* “AUTO DIM” does not work for CD/MP3/WMA.
BRIGHTNESS Adjust if the entire picture is bright
or dark (–8 to +8).
CONTRAST
Adjust if the far and near positions
are unnatural (–7 to +7).
SATURATION Adjust if the picture is whitish or
blackish (–7 to +7).
TINT
Adjust if the human skin color is
unnatural (–7 to +7).
SHARPNESS
Adjust if the picture is indistinct
(–8 to +8).
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Adjust the parameter.
Turning Off the Power
Remote
ONLY
ENTER
Automatically
To turn off the unit after playback is over—Auto
Standby
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 to adjust other parameters.
On
To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.
Canceled
Remote
ONLY
Setting the Clock
(at the same time)
Without setting the built-in clock, you cannot use Daily
Timers, Recording Timer (see page 31) and Sleep Timer.
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL
or CLOCK/TIMER. You can return to the previous step.
When Auto Standby is in use, the A.STANDBY indicator
lights on the display.
When disc play stops, the A.STANDBY indicator starts
flashing. If no operation is done for about 3 minutes while
the indicator is flashing, the System turns off (stands by)
automatically.
1 Activate the clock setting mode.
CLOCK/
TIMER
• Auto Standby does not work while you are listening to
radio (FM/AM) and the external component (AUX).
To turn off the unit after a certain period of time
—Sleep Timer
• If you have already adjusted the clock before, press the
button repeatedly until the clock setting mode is
selected.
1 Specify the time (in minutes).
SLEEP
2 Adjust the hour.
A.STANDBY
SET
10 20 30 60 90 120 150
Canceled
2 Wait until the set time goes off.
3 Adjust the minute.
To check the time remaining until the shut-off time
SET
SLEEP
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
Now the built-in clock starts working.
• If you press the button repeatedly, you can change the shut-
off time.
To check the current clock time during play
DISPLAY
Clock
Source information
• While playing a DVD and MP3/WMA, you cannot check
the current clock time (see page 9) .
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unique DVD/VCD Operations
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the View Angle
Remote control
While playing back a chapter (of DVD Video) containing
multi-view angles, you can view the same scene from
different angles.
• You can also select the multi-view angles using the on-
screen bar (see page 24).
SUB TITLE
ANGLE
AUDIO
ZOOM
While playing...
10 keys
ANGLE
3
,
,
,
ENTER
DVD/CD 3
8
(at the same time)
7
Ex.:
SLOW –/+
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
2
3
SHIFT
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
2
3
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Subtitle Language
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter (of DVD
Video) containing subtitles in different languages, you can
select the subtitle language to display on the TV.
For SVCD: While playing, you can select the subtitles even
if no subtitles are recorded on the disc.
• You can also select the subtitle language using the on-
screen bar (see page 24).
While playing a DVD Video...
1 Display the subtitle selection window.
1/3
ENGLISH
1/3
SUB TITLE
ENGLISH
2
(at the same time)
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select the subtitle language.
While playing a DVD Video...
Ex.:
1/3
2/3
3/3
ENGLISH
FRENCH
JAPANESE
Ex.:
1/3
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
ENGLISH
1/3
2/3
3/3
ENGLISH
FRENCH
JAPANESE
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
While playing a DVD Audio...
Ex.:
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
2
3
While playing an SVCD video...
While playing a Karaoke SVCD or VCD...
SUB TITLE
SVCD
AUDIO
ST1
R2
ST2
L1
2
1
L2
R1
VCD
ST
L
R
(at the same time)
(at the same time)
–/4
OFF
1/4
1
2/4
2
ST1/ST2 To listen to normal stereo (2 channel)
ST
playback.
4/4
3/4
L1/L2/L
To listen to the left audio channel.
4
3
R1/R2/R To listen to the right audio channel.
• SVCD can have 4 audio channels. Karaoke SVCD usually
uses these 4 channels to record two 2-channel recordings
(ST1/ST2).
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Audio Track
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter containing
audio languages, you can select the language to listen to.
For DVD Audio: While playing back a track containing
audio channels, you can select the audio channel to listen to.
For Karaoke SVCD/VCD: When playing back a track, you
can select the audio channel to play.
Remote
ONLY
Playing Back a Bonus Group
Some DVD Audios have a special group called “bonus
group” whose contents are not open to the public.
• To play back a bonus group, you have to enter the specific
“key number” (a kind of password) for the bonus group.
The way of getting the key number depends on the disc.
• You can also select the audio track using the on-screen bar
(see page 24).
1 Select the bonus group.
AUDIO
• The bonus group is usually recorded as the last group
(for example, if a disc contains 4 groups including a
bonus group, “group 4” is the bonus group).
• For how to select the group, see “To select a title/group”
on page 13.
1
(at the same time)
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Enter the key number.
2 Select slow motion speed.
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
+
SLOW
SLOW
–
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ENTER
Forward slow motion starts.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
Reverse slow motion* starts.
+
SLOW
SLOW
1/32
1/32
1/16
1/16
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
1/2
3
Follow the interactive instructions shown on the
screen.
–
To cancel the key number entry, press 7.
*Not available for SVCD/VCD.
Remote
ONLY
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
Special Effect Playback
Still picture playback
To replay the previous scenes
(One-Touch Replay)
To start still picture play- To resume normal
back:
• This function is only used while playing DVD Video.
While playing back...
playback:
While playing...
The playback position moves
back about 10 seconds before the
current position (only within the
same title).
DVD/CD
Frame-by-frame playback
Remote
ONLY
Zoom
1 While playing...
1 While playing back...
Still picture playback starts.
ZOOM
4
2 Advance the still picture frame by frame.
(at the same time)
ZOOM
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
ZOOM 1
ZOOM 2
ZOOM 3
ZOOM 4
ZOOM 5
4
ZOOM OFF
ZOOM 6
Slow-motion playback
1 While playing...
2 Move the zoomed-in position.
Still picture playback starts.
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding
SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Disc Operations
Programming the Playing Order—
Remote control
Remote
ONLY
Program Play
You can arrange the playing order of the chapters or tracks
(up to 99) before you start playback.
1 Before starting playback, activate Program Play.
PLAY
10 keys
MODE
PROGRAM
RANDOM
Canceled
ENTER
,
CANCEL
7
DVD/CD 3
PRGM
8
PLAY
On the display
MODE
4
/
¢
REPEAT
REPEAT A-B
PROGRAM
No Group/Title
1
2
3
Track/Chapter
SHIFT
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
USE NUMERIC KEYS TO PROGRAM TRACKS.
USE CANCEL TO DELETE THE PROGRAM.
On the TV
2 Select chapters or tracks you want for Program Play.
• For DVD/MP3/WMA:
Main unit
1 Select a title or group number.
2 Select a chapter or track number.
3 Repeat the above steps 1 and 2.
• For SVCD/VCD/CD:
1 Select tracks.
To enter the numbers directly:
Examples:
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
To enter number 5, press 5.
To enter number 15, press +10,
then 5.
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
To enter number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
9
7
10
10
DVD/CD 3
, 7,
4
¢
0
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
3 Start playback.
Playing at Random—Random Play
You can play all chapters or tracks at random.
• Random Play cannot be used for some DVDs.
Playback starts in the order you
have programmed.
DVD/CD
1 Before starting playback, activate Random Play.
PLAY
MODE
To skip a step:
To pause:
To stop:
PROGRAM
RANDOM
GROUP/TITLE
Canceled
To release, press
DVD/CD 3.
RANDOM
To check the programmed contents
Before or after playback...
2 Start playback.
In the reverse order.
Playback starts in random order.
Random Play ends when the
entire disc has been played.
DVD/CD
In the programmed order.
To skip a chapter/
track:
To pause:
To stop:
• You can also use 4 or ¢ to check the programmed
contents.
To modify the program
Before or after playback...
To release, press
DVD/CD 3.
To erase the last step:
To erase the entire
program:
CANCEL
RETURN
To exit from Random Play
Before or after playback...
PLAY
MODE
PROGRAM
RANDOM
To add steps in the program:
Repeat step 2.
Canceled
To exit from Program Play
Before or after playback...
PLAY
MODE
PROGRAM
RANDOM
Canceled
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
A-B Repeat
Playing Repeatedly
You can repeat playback of a desired portion by specifying
the beginning (point A) and the ending (point B).
• A-B Repeat cannot be used for MP3/WMA and for some
DVDs.
• You can also select the repeat mode using the on-screen
bar (see page 25).
• A-B Repeat can be used within the same title while playing
a DVD Video, and within the same track for the other
discs.
Repeat Play
You can repeat playback.
• For DVD Video:
While playing...
1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), select
REPEAT A-B
the start point (A).
*
REPEAT
REP CHAP
REP TTL
starts flashing on the
REP OFF
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
display.
(Canceled)
A-
•
appears on the TV
if the TV is turned on.
• For DVD Audio:
While playing or before playback...
(at the same time)
REPEAT A-B
*
REPEAT
REP TRK
REP GRP
2 Select the end point (B).
REP OFF
(Canceled)
stops flashing.
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
A-B
•
appears on the
• For MP3/WMA:
While playing or before playback...
TV.
REPEAT A-B
• You can search for the end
point using the ¡ button.
REPEAT
*
REP TRK
REP GRP
REP ALL
(at the same time)
REP OFF
(Canceled)
To cancel A-B Repeat, press REPEAT A-B again while
holding SHIFT.
• For CD/SVCD/VCD:
While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD) or before
playback...
• A-B Repeat will also be canceled when you stop play or
skip the chapter or track.
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
*
REP ALL
REP TRK
Main Unit
ONLY
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock
REP OFF
(Canceled)
You can lock the disc tray so that no one can eject the loaded
disc.
• This is possible while the System is on standby.
REP CHAP* Repeats the current chapter.
REP TTL Repeats the current title.
REP TRK* Repeats the current track.
REP GRP Repeats the current group.
REP ALL Repeats the disc or program.
While the disc tray is closed...
*During Program Play and Random Play, “REP STEP”
appears instead of these indications, and repeat modes
change as follows for all the discs.
(at the same time)
REP STEP
REP ALL
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.
“UNLOCKED” appears on the display.
REP OFF
(Canceled)
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On-Screen Disc Operations
On-screen Bar Information
Remote control
You can check the disc information (except for MP3/WMA/
JPEG disc) and use some functions through the on-screen
bar.
ZOOM
10 keys
1 Disc type
2 Playback information
Indication
Mbps
Meanings
Current transfer rate
(Megabits per second)
ENTER
,
,
,
ON SCREEN
CANCEL
TITLE
CHAP
2
3
DVD/CD 3
8
Current title
7
REPEAT
¡
Current chapter
Current group
Current track
Time indications
4
/
¢
GROUP
1
TRACK 14
TOTAL1:25:58
SHIFT
3 Operation modes
Indication
Meanings
Playback
/
/
Forward/Reverse search
Forward/Reverse slow-motion
On-screen bars
DVD Video
Pause
Stop
1
2
3
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
4 Function icons (on the pull-down menu)
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
TRACK
1
/3/1
1/
3
1
Indication
Meanings
TIME
Select to change the time indication.
4
DVD Audio
OFF
Select to repeat playback.
Select for time search.
Select for chapter search.
Select for track search.
1
2
3
3
3
3
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
DVD-AUDIO
CHAP.
TIME
OFF
1/
3
1/
3
PAGE
TRACK
4
SVCD
Select to change the audio language or
channel (see also page 19).
1/3
1/3
1
2
Select to change subtitle language
(see also page 18).
TRACK
3
TIME
00:58
SVCD
TIME
O
F
F
S
T
1
-/
4
Select to change the view angle (see
also page 18).
1/3
4
4
VCD
1
2
Select to change the page.
PAGE 1 / 5
TRACK
3
TIME
00:58
VCD
TIME
O
F
F
S
T
CD
1
2
TRACK
3
TIME
00:58
CD
TIME
O
F
F
4
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Operations Using the On-screen Bar
For detailed operations of the following functions, see
also “Operations Using the On-screen Bar” on the left.
Ex.: Selecting a subtitle (French) for DVD Video
While a disc is selected as the source...
To change the time information
You can change the time information in the on-screen bar
and the display window on the main unit.
1 Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
ON SCREEN
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pull-
down menu.
8.5Mbps
TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TIME 0:00:58
DVD-VIDEO
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
DVD-VIDEO
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3
1
/
3
1
/1
TIME
2 Make sure
is selected (highlighted).
Goes off
3 Change the time indication.
2 Select (highlight) the item you want.
ENTER
REM 0:11:23
TOTAL 1:01:58
TIME 0:00:58
T.REM 0:35:24
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
REM
Elapsed playing time of the current
chapter/track.
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
3 Display the pop-up window.
Remaining time of the current chapter/
track.
ENTER
T
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
3
TIME 0:00:58
TOTAL
T.REM
Elapsed disc time.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
Remaining disc time.
ENGLISH
To erase the on-screen bar
4 Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
ON SCREEN
T
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
3
TIME 0:00:58
1
/3/1
2
/
3
1
FRENCH
Repeat Play
• See also page 23.
5 Finish the setting.
1 While playing a disc (without PBC for SVCD/VCD),
display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD Video: Repeat Play can be selected
before starting playback.
Pop-up window goes off.
ENTER
2 Select
.
OFF
3 Display the pop-up window.
To erase the on-screen bar
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
ON SCREEN
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
OFF
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Select the repeat mode you want.
Time Search
You can move to a particular point by specifying the elapsed
playing time from the beginning.
A-B
Repeats a desired portion (see below).
TITLE
GROUP
ALL
Repeats the current title.
Repeats the current group.
1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display
the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD: Time Search can be used before
starting playback.
Repeats the disc (except for DVD) or
program.
CHAPTER
TRACK*
OFF
*
Repeats the current chapter.
Repeats the current track.
Cancels Repeat Play.
2 Select
.
3 Display the pop-up window.
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
*During Program Play and Random Play, “STEP”
appears.
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
TIME _ : _ _ : _ _
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
5 Finish the setting.
4 Enter the time.
You can specify the time in hours/minutes/seconds.
ENTER
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
Examples:
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
To move to a point of 1
(hours): 02 (minutes): 00
(seconds), press 1, 0, 2, 0, then
0.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
A-B Repeat
• See also page 23.
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
To move to a point of 54
(minutes): 00 (seconds), press
0, 5, 4, 0, then 0.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pull-
down menu.
2 Select
.
OFF
• It is always required to enter the hour digit (even “0”
hour), but it is not required to enter trailing zeros (the
last two digits in the examples above).
3 Display the pop-up window.
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
• To correct a misentry, press Cursor
entry.
<
to erase the last
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
OFF
5 Finish the setting.
4 Select “A-B.”
The System starts playing the disc
from the selected playing time.
ENTER
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
1/3/1
1/
3
1
A–B
5 Select the start point (A).
Chapter/Track Search
You can search for the chapter (DVD Video) or track (DVD
Audio) number to play.
ENTER
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
C
H
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
A-
CHAP.
1
/3
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pull-
down menu.
6 Select the end point (B).
CHAP.
TRACK
2 Select
or
.
A-B Repeat starts. The selected
portion plays repeatedly.
• Before pressing ENTER, you can
search for the end point using the
¡ button.
ENTER
3 Display the pop-up window.
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
CHAPTER
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
_
To cancel A-B Repeat, repeat steps 1 to 3, and select “OFF”
in step 4.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
4 Enter the desired chapter/track number.
Operations on the CONTROL Screen
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
Examples:
To select chapter/track 5, press
5.
To select chapter/track 15,
press 1, then 5.
The CONTROL screen automatically appears on the TV
when you load an MP3, WMA, or JPEG disc.
You can search for and play the desired tracks through the
CONTROL screen.
• If both types of files (MP3/WMA files and JPEG files) are
recorded on a disc, select the file type to play (see page 35).
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
To select chapter/track 30,
press 3, then 0.
CONTROL screen
Ex.: When the MP3 disc is loaded.
6
• To correct a misentry, press the 10 keys until the
desired number shown in the pop-up window.
7
8
5 Finish the setting.
REPEAT TRACK Time : 00:00:14
1
The System starts playing the
Group : 2 / 3
Track : 5 / 14 (Total 41)
ENTER
9
searched chapter or track.
Spring
Summer
Fall
Cloudy.mp3
Fair.mp3
Fog.mp3
Hail.mp3
Indian summer.mp3
Rain.mp3
Shower.mp3
Snow.mp3
Thunder.mp3
Typhoon.mp3
Wind.mp3
2
3
Winter
Track Information
0
-
Title
Rain
Artist
Remote
4
5
ONLY
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures
Album
Winter sky.mp3
While playing back a track (of DVD Audio) linked to
browsable still pictures (BSP), you can select the still picture
(turn the page) to be shown on the TV.
• If a track is linked to browsable still pictures (BSP), they
are usually shown in turn automatically during playback.
1 Current group number/total group number
2 Current group (in blue)
3 Group list
4 Track information (ID3 Tag Version 1.0: only for
MP3/WMA)
5 Current track (in blue)
6 Repeat Play setting
7 Elapsed playing time of the current track
(only for MP3/WMA)
1 While playing a DVD Audio, display the on-screen
bar with the pull-down menu.
2 Select
.
PAGE 1 / 5
3 Display the pop-up window.
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
1/ 1/
DVD-AUDIO
TIME
8 Operation mode icon
OFF
3
5
TRACK
PAGE
9 Current track number/total number of tracks in the
current group (total number of tracks on the loaded
disc)
0 Highlight (green) bar
- Track list
1
4 Select a still picture you want.
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
1/ 3/
DVD-AUDIO
TIME
OFF
3
5
TRACK
PAGE
3
5 Finish the setting.
ENTER
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To move the highlight (green) bar between group list and
track list:
To repeat slide-show for JPEG
While playing or before starting playback...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
Moves the bar to the track
list.
REP GRP
REP ALL
REP OFF
(Canceled)
Moves the bar to the group
list.
REP GRP Repeats the current group.
REP ALL Repeats the disc.
To select a group/track in the list:
Move the highlight bar to a desired
item.
• For Repeat Play of MP3/WMA, see page 23.
• If you move the highlight bar
while playing back an MP3/
WMA disc, the selected track
starts playback automatically.
To zoom in the still picture
• You cannot zoom in the still picture during slide-show.
1 While playing back a still picture...
• During slide-show, press 8 to display the still picture,
then...
To start playback
For MP3/WMA:
ZOOM
4
Playback starts with the selected
track.
ENTER
• Pressing DVD/CD 3 also starts
playback.
(at the same time)
ZOOM
For JPEG:
ZOOM 1
ZOOM 2
4
The selected track (still picture)
is displayed until you change it.
ZOOM OFF
ENTER
2 Move the zoomed-in position.
Slide-show playback starts.
Each track (still picture) is
shown on the screen for about 3
seconds, then changes one after
another.
DVD/CD
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding
• Once you start playing back a JPEG track, the CONTROL
SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.
screen goes off.
• To cancel slide-show, and display the current still picture,
press 8.
To skip a track:
To stop playback:
GROUP/TITLE
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Tape Operations
IMPORTANT
It may be unlawful to record or play back copyrighted
Remote control
material without the consent of the copyright owner.
Recording on a Tape
You can use type I tapes for recording.
• To play a tape, see page 12.
REV. MODE
1 Insert a recordable cassette.
Push
Insert
Close
TAPE 2 3
FM/AM
AUX
DVD/CD
3
7
With the tape side facing outside
2 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
SHIFT
settings on the display.
Reverse mode indicator
Tape direction indicator
Current source
Main unit
To change the direction
3 (forward)
2 (reverse)
PUSH OPEN 0
To change the Reverse mode if necessary
REV. MODE
7
(at the same time)
TAPE 2 3
FM/AM
AUX
To record on both sides.
• When using Reverse Mode, start
DVD/CD
3
(
)
recording in the forward (3) direction.
REC
7
To record on only one side.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Select and start playing the source—“FM,” “AM,”
“DVD/CD,” or “AUX.”
To record Program Play or Random Play
1 Select Program Play (and make a program) or Random
Play, but do not start playback.
• When recording a disc, you can also use “Synchronized
Disc Recording” (see below).
2 Press REC to start recording.
• When disc play stops, recording continues. It is
required that recording be stopped manually.
4 Start recording.
REC
To record only your favorite track
You can specify tracks to be recorded on the tape while
listening to a disc (except for DVD Video).
On the main unit
1 Start playing a disc.
To stop recording:
DVD/CD
2 While a track you want to record on the tape is
playing...
Synchronized Disc Recording
You can start and stop both disc play and tape recording at
the same time.
The disc player returns to the
REC
beginning of that track and the
track is recorded on the tape.
After recording the track, the
disc player and cassette deck
To record the entire disc
On the main unit
automatically stop.
1 Load a disc and insert a recordable cassette.
• If the current playing source is not the disc player, press
DVD/CD 3, then 7.
3 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to record other tracks you want.
• You can exchange the discs if necessary.
2 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
settings on the display.
To protect your recording
Cassettes have two small tabs on the back to protect
from unexpected erasure or re-recording.
To protect your recording, remove these tabs.
• See step 2 of “Recording on a Tape” on page 29.
3 Start recording.
The System automatically
REC
creates 4-second blanks between
the tunes recorded on the tapes.
On the main unit
To re-record on a protected tape, cover the holes with
adhesive tape.
• When either disc play* or recording ends, both disc player
and the cassette deck stop at the same time.
• If you press REC soon after the recording is stopped, “NO
REC” may appear.
* For DVD Video: When a title is finished playing.
To record a “Live” disc
It will not be desirable to put 4-second blank portions
between the tunes recorded on the tape.
To record the entire disc without any interruption
recorded, pause the disc play (press DVD/CD 3, then 8)
before pressing REC.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer Operations
Remote
ONLY
Setting the Timer
Remote control
Using Daily Timer, you can wake up with your favorite
song. On the other hand, with Recording Timer, you can
make a tape of a radio broadcast automatically.
• You can store three Daily Timer settings and one
Recording Timer setting; however, you can activate only
one of Daily Timers and Recording Timer at the same time.
• To exit from the timer setting, press CLOCK/TIMER as
required.
STANDBY/ON
CLOCK/
TIMER
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL.
You can return to the previous step.
SET
,
1 Select one of the timer setting modes you want to set—
Daily 1 ON time, Daily 2 ON time, Daily 3 ON time, or
Recording Timer ON time.
CANCEL
Daily 1 Timer
Daily 2 Timer
Daily 3 Timer
CLOCK/
TIMER
DAILY 1*
ON (Time)
DAILY 2
*
ON (Time)
DAILY 3
*
ON (Time)
ON (Time)
Canceled
Clock setting
REC TMR
(see page 17)
Recording Timer
1
Ex. When Daily Timer 1 setting mode is selected
2 Make the timer setting as you want.
Repeat the following operations until you finish setting in
the following order—
SET
For Daily Timers:
1
2
3
Set the hour then the minute for on-time.
Set the hour then the minute for off-time.
Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”
“TUNER AM,” “TAPE,” “DISC,” or “AUX.”
1
* Daily Timer initial settings when shipped from the
factory
4
For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a
preset channel.
• DAILY 1:ON Time (6:00)/OFF Time (8:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
• DAILY 2:ON Time (12:00)/OFF Time (14:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
• DAILY 3:ON Time (18:00)/OFF Time (20:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
For “DISC”: Select the title/group number, then
the chapter/track number.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Select the volume level.
•You can select the volume level (“VOL 0” to
“VOL 50” and “VOL – –”).
If you select “VOL – –,” the volume is set to the last
level when the unit has been turned off.
How Recording Timer actually works
When Recording Timer has been set, Timer (
indicator and the REC indicator are lit on the display.
Recording Timer works only once.
)
Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information
appears in sequence.
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station or
changes the source to “AUX”, sets the volume level to the
preset level, and starts recording.
For Recording Timer:
1
2
3
Set the hour then the minute for on-time.
Set the hour then the minute for off-time.
Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”
“TUNER AM,” or “AUX.”
When the off-time comes
The System stops recording, and turns off (stands by).
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change
it.
4
For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a
preset channel.
Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information
appears in sequence.
To turn off the Timer after its setting is done
Since Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday,
you may need to cancel it on some particular days.
• Recording Timer can also be canceled temporarily.
3 Turn off the unit (on standby) if you have set the timer
with the System turned on.
STANDBY/ON
1 Select the Timer you want to cancel.
Daily 1 Timer
Daily 2 Timer
Daily 3 Timer
CLOCK/
TIMER
DAILY 1*
ON (Time)
DAILY 2
*
ON (Time)
DAILY 3
*
ON (Time)
ON (Time)
Canceled
Clock setting
REC TMR
(see page 17)
Recording Timer
How Daily Timer actually works
1
Ex.To cancel Daily
Timer 1
Once the Daily Timer has been set, the timer (
)
indicator and timer number indicator (1/2/3) are lit on the
display. Daily Timer is activated at the same time
everyday until the timer is turned off manually (see the
next column) or another timer is activated.
2 Turn off the selected Timer.
To turn on the Timer
CANCEL
RETURN
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, starts playing the specified source
(except “AUX”), and sets the volume level to the preset
level.
• While Daily Timer is working, the timer (
and timer number indicator (1/2/3) flash on the display.
1 Select the Timer (DAILY 1/2/3, and REC TMR) you
want to activate.
) indicator
Daily 1 Timer
Daily 2 Timer
Daily 3 Timer
CLOCK/
TIMER
When the off-time comes
The System stops playback, and turns off (stands by)
automatically.
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change
DAILY 1
ON (Time)
DAILY 2
ON (Time)
DAILY 3
ON (Time)
REC TMR
ON (Time)
Canceled
Clock setting
(see page 17)
Recording Timer
it.
2 Activate the selected Timer.
SET
1
Ex. When Daily Timer 1 (DAILY 1) is
activated
3 Wait until the indication goes off.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Menu Operations
.
Remote
ONLY
Operating Procedure
Remote control
You can use the Setup Menus only when a disc is selected
as the source and its playback is not yet started.
Ex.: Selecting “STILL PICTURE” for “FILE TYPE”:
1 Display the Setup Menu.
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
MENU
SET UP
10 keys
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
SET UP
ENTER
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
,
,
,
(at the same time)
2 Select one of the Setup Menus.
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
AUDIO
SHIFT
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
3 Select the item you want to adjust.
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
Setup Menu Icons
AUDIO
The icon for the selected Setup Menu will be
highlighted.
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
4 Display the pop-up window.
Ex.: LANGUAGE Setup Menu is selected.
PICTURE
ENTER
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
1
2
3
4
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
AUDIO
AUDIO
STILL PICTURE
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT . USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
5 Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
AUDIO
AUDIO
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
STILL PICTURE
SELECT
ENTER
USE USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO SELECT
.
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
1 LANGUAGE Setup Menu
2 PICTURE Setup Menu
3 AUDIO Setup Menu
4 OTHERS Setup Menu
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Finish the setting.
SUBTITLE
ENTER
Some discs have multiple subtitle languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43) or “OFF (no subtitle).”
7 Repeat steps 3 to 4 to set other items on the same
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
Setup Menu.
Select one of the languages shown on the TV from—
ENGLISH, SPANISH and CHINESE.
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set other items on another Setup
Menu.
To exit from the Setup Menu
PICTURE Setup Menu
You can select the desired options concerning a picture or
monitor screen.
MENU
SET UP
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
(at the same time)
AUDIO
LANGUAGE Setup Menu
You can select the initial languages for disc playback. You
can also select the language shown on the TV screen while
operating this System.
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
MONITOR TYPE
LANGUAGE
Select the monitor type of your TV to play DVD Video
recorded with aspect ratio of 16:9.
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
For the multi-color system TV
When you use a multi-color system TV, you can change the
color system of the System automatically by selecting
“MULTI” options for the monitor type. In this case, the color
system of the System is changed to match to that of the
loaded disc regardless of the VIDEO OUT SELECT setting
(see page 6).
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
MENU LANGUAGE
Some discs have multiple menu languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43).
Select one of the following:
16:9 / 16:9 MULTI
:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 16:9 (wide
TV).
AUDIO LANGUAGE
4:3 LB (Letter Box) / 4:3 MULTI LB:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3
(conventional TV). While viewing a wide screen
picture, the black bars appear on the top and the bottom
of the screen.
Some discs have multiple audio languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43).
4:3 PS (Pan Scan) / 4:3 MULTI PS:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3. While
viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not
appear; however, the left and right edges of the pictures
will not be shown on the screen.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO Setup Menu
You can adjust the sound settings of the System.
AUDIO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
DOWN MIX
STREAM/PCM
DOLBY SURROUND
AUTO
Ex.: 16:9
Ex.: 4:3 LB
Ex: 4:3 PS
D. RANGE COMPRESSION
PICTURE SOURCE
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting an
appropriate option—picture source type (either video source
or film source).
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
When using the digital output terminal on the rear, set this
correctly according to the connected component.
Select one of the following:
AUTO: Normally select this.
When playing back a disc containing both video
and film sources, the System automatically
changes the processing to match it to the picture
type (film or video source) of the current chapter.
Select one of the following:
PCM ONLY:
To connect to a linear PCM digital
equipment such as an MD recorder.
FILM: To play a film source disc.
VIDEO: To play a video source disc.
DOLBYDIGITAL To connect to a Dolby Digital decoder
/PCM:
or an amplifier with a built-in Dolby
Digital decoder.
STREAM/PCM: To connect to a DTS decoder or an
amplifier with a built-in DTS decoder.
SCREEN SAVER
You can activate or deactivate screen saver while operating
the built-in disc player.
• See also “DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals” on
page 45.
Select one of the following:
ON:
The pictures on the TV becomes dark when no
operation is done for about 5 minutes.
DOWN MIX
When playing a multi-channel DVD, the System converts
the signals into 2 channels.
OFF:
To cancel the screen saver.
Downmix setting is effective for the speaker output (and
digital audio output if “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” is set
to “PCM ONLY”) from this System.
FILE TYPE
If both audio tracks (MP3 or WMA files) and still picture
(JPEG files) are recorded on a disc, you can select which to
play.
Select one of the following:
DOLBY
SURROUND: Pro Logic decoder.
STEREO: To connect a conventional stereo
amplifier, receiver, MD player, TV, etc.
To connect an amplifier with the Dolby
Select one of the following:
AUDIO:
To play MP3/WMA files.
STILL PICTURE: To play JPEG files.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. RANGE COMPRESSION
ON SCREEN GUIDE
You can activate or deactivate the on-screen guide icons (see
page 13).
• When recording the picture on a VCR, select “OFF” to
avoid recording the guide icons on your video tape.
You can compress the dynamic range (the difference
between the loudest sound and the softest sound) to enjoy a
powerful sound even at a low volume level when listening to
Dolby Digital software. This is useful at night.
• The effectiveness varies depends on software.
Select one of the following:
Select one of the following:
ON:
To activate the on-screen guide icons.
To cancel the on-screen guide icons.
AUTO: To enjoy powerful sounds with full dynamic
OFF:
range.
ON:
Best for watching a movie at a low volume level.
AV COMPULINK MODE
When connecting the System to a JVC’s TV with the AV
COMPU LINK remote control system, select the proper
setting.
OTHERS Setup Menu
You can change some other convenient functions.
Select one of the following:
DVD1: To connect to the VIDEO-3 Input jacks on the
OTHERS
TV.
RESUME
ON
ON
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
DVD2: To connect to the VIDEO-1 Input jacks on the
DVD1
TV.
DVD3: To connect to the VIDEO-2 Input jacks on the
TV.
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control
system” on page 6.
RESUME
PARENTAL LOCK
You can activate or deactivate Resume for disc playback
Select this to enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
See the section that follows.
(see page 13).
Select one of the following:
ON:
To activate Resume.
To cancel Resume.
OFF:
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Select “COUNTRY CODE,” then display the pop-up
Restricting the Review
window.
Remote
ONLY
—Parental Lock
PARENTAL LOCK
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
G
GR
ENTER
GS
O
GT
_
You can restrict playback of DVD Video containing violent
scenes and those unsuitable for your family members. Once
you have set the rating level, such violent scenes (for which
a higher level than you set is assigned) may be skipped or
changed to another scene (depending on how the disc is
programmed).
GU
GW
GY
HK
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
6 Select the country code of your area.
• See “Country/Area Codes List” on page 44 to find your
country code.
To set Parental Lock
Set the rating level—Level 1 (most restrictive) to Level 8
(least restrictive).
ENTER
1 Display the Setup Menu.
LANGUAGE
MENU
SET UP
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
The System automatically enters “SET LEVEL” mode.
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
7 Make sure “SET LEVEL” is selected, then display the
SELECT
USE
pop-up window.
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
ENTER
ENTER
PARENTAL LOCK
(at the same time)
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
H
NONE
8
N
7
6
_
5
4
3
2 Select the OTHERS Setup Menus.
OTHERS
RESUME
ON
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
ON
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
DVD1
8 Set the rating level (NONE, 8 – 1).
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
ENTER
3 Select “PARENTAL LOCK.”
OTHERS
RESUME
ON
ON
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
DVD1
The System automatically enters “PASSWORD” entry
mode.
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
9 Make sure “PASSWORD” is selected, then enter any
4-digit number for your password.
4 Enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
ENTER
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
PARENTAL LOCK
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
HK
ENTER
NONE
_
_
_
_
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
10 Finish the setting.
ENTER
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the setting
To release Parental Lock temporarily
When you set a strict rating level, some discs may not be
played back at all. When you try to play such a disc, the
following screen appears on the TV.
1 Display the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
• Follow steps 1 to 4 of “To set Parental Lock.”
PARENTAL LOCK
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
HK
4
PARENTAL LOCK
TEMPORARY RELEASE
NOT RELEASE
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
PASSWORD
SELECT
ENTER
PASSWORD? ••• PRESS
0
~
9
KEYS
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
“PASSWORD” is automatically selected.
• You cannot select any item other than “EXIT” until you
enter the correct password.
SELECT
ENTER
PASSWORD? ••• PRESS
0
~
9
KEYS
2 Enter your password.
1 Select “TEMPORARY RELEASE,” then ENTER.
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
“PASSWORD” is
ENTER
automatically selected.
ENTER
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
• If you enter a wrong password, “– – – –” appears again.
If you missed three times, “EXIT” is automatically
selected. In this case, press ENTER to exit from the
PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
• If you do not play back such a disc, select “NOT
RELEASE,” then ENTER. Then eject the disc.
2 Enter your password.
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
• If you forget your password, enter “8888.”
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
3 Change the settings.
ENTER
• Follow steps 5 to 8 of “To set Parental Lock.”
4 Enter your password again (after selecting
REV. MODE
FM MODE
“PASSWORD” manually if necessary).
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ENTER
• If you enter a wrong password three times, “NOT
RELEASE” is automatically selected. In this case, press
ENTER. Then eject the disc.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
• If you want to change a password, enter a new four digit
number in this step.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Information
• When using an 8 cm disc, place it on the inner circle of the disc
tray.
Learning More about This System
•
On some DVD, SVCD, or VCD discs, the actual operations
may be different from what is explained in this manual, due to
the programming and disc structure; such differences are not a
malfunction of this System.
Getting Started (see pages 3 to 6)
Changing the Scanning Mode
• To enjoy the progressive video picture, connect a TV with the
progressive video input using component video cord.
• Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When
you play back such a disc, “LR ONLY” appears on the display
and the System plays back the left front and right front signals.
• 3D Phonic setting is also applied to the optical digital output
signals through the DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal.
• When using Resume on SVCD or VCD with PBC, the
playback might start on a position slightly different from
where you have stopped.
Before Operating the System (see pages 7 to 9)
Playable Disc Types:
• If you play back an NTSC disc with this setting set to “PAL,”
you can watch the playback pictures (the disc will be
reproduced using “PAL 60” format), but the TV screen may
roll over upward and downward rapidly.
• If you play back a PAL disc with this setting set to “NTSC,”
you can watch the playback pictures, but the following
symptoms may occur:
• You can use Resume only for the DVD/SVCD/VCD except
for some discs—depending how the disc is programmed.
– The items on the disc menu will be blurred, and be shown
slightly shifted when highlighted.
– The aspect ratio of the picture may differ from the original
aspect ratio.
Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments
(see pages 15 to 17)
Adjusting the Volume:
• Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting
the headphones.
– The picture movement is not smooth.
Daily Operations—Playback (see pages 10 to 14)
Listening to the Radio:
Adjusting the Sound:
• This function also affects the sound through the headphones.
• If you store a new station into an occupied preset number, the
previously stored station in that number will be erased.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the preset stations will be erased in a few days. If this
happens, preset the stations again.
Setting the Clock:
• “0:00” will flash on the display until you set the clock.
• The clock may gain or lose 1 to 2 minutes per month. If this
happens, reset the clock.
Unique DVD/VCD Operations (see pages 18 to 20)
Playing Back a Tape:
• During slow-motion playback, no sound will be reproduced.
• While zoomed in, the picture may look coarse.
• It is not recommended to use the C-120 or longer tapes. These
tapes easily jams in the pinch rollers and the capstans, and may
cause characteristic deterioration.
Advanced Disc Operations (see pages 21 to 23)
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play:
• If you try to program a 100th track, “MEM FULL” appears on
the display.
Playing Back a Disc:
• For MP3/WMA playback...
– This System cannot play “packet write” discs.
– MP3/WMA discs are required a longer readout time than
regular CDs. (It depends on the complexity of the group/file
configuration.)
– Some MP3/WMA files cannot be played back and will be
skipped. This result from their recording processes and
conditions.
• While programming steps...
Your entry will be ignored if you have tried to program an item
number that does not exist on the disc (for example, selecting
track 14 on a disc that only has 12 tracks).
Playing at Random—Random Play:
– When making MP3/WMA discs, use ISO 9660 Level 1 or
Level 2 for the disc format.
– This System can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the letter
case—upper/lower).
• The 4 button does not work for skipping chapters or tracks,
but only work for going back to the beginning of the current
chapter or track.
– It is recommended that you make each MP3 file at a
sampling rate of 44.1 kHz and at bit rate of 128 kbps. This
System cannot play back files made at bit rate of less than 64
kbps.
– This System can recognize the total of 1000 tracks and of 99
groups (each group can contain up to 150 tracks). Those
exceeding the maximum number cannot be recognized.
– Playback order of MP3/WMA tracks may be different from
the one you have intended while recording (see page 40). If
a folder does not include MP3/WMA tracks, they are
ignored.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On-Screen Disc Operations (see pages 24 to 28)
• For JPEG files playback...
– It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480
resolution. (If a file has been recorded at a resolution of
more than 640 x 480, it will take a long time to be shown.)
– This System can play only baseline JPEG files. Progressive
JPEG files or lossless JPEG files cannot be played.
Timer Operations (see pages 31 to 32)
• When using an external component—“AUX” for the playback
source, set the timer built in the component at the same time.
• Before turning off the power, do not forget to prepare the
required materials—a disc or tape for playback and a
recordable tape for recording.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the timer will be canceled. You need to set the clock
first, then the timer again.
• Without stopping the recording, you cannot change the source
after Recording Timer start recording.
• If you set the Sleep Timer after Daily Timer starts playing the
selected source, Daily Timer is canceled.
• If you set the Sleep Timer after Recording Timer starts
recording, Recording Timer is canceled, but recording
continues until Sleep Timer shuts off the power.
Baseline JPEG format:
Used for digital cameras, web,
etc.
Progressive JPEG format: Used for web.
Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely used
now.
– This System may not play back JPEG files properly which
are recorded by the devices other than digital still camera.
– If progressive or lossless JPEG files are played back, a black
screen appears. In this case, stop playback and select a
baseline JPEG file. Note that it may take a long time to
select another file.
Setup Menu Operations (see pages 33 to 38)
LANGUAGE:
Advanced Tape Operations (see pages 29 to 30)
Recording on a Tape:
• The recording level is automatically set correctly. Thus, you
can adjust the sound you are actually listening to without
affecting the recording level.
• When the language you have selected for “MENU
LANGUAGE,” “AUDIO LANGUAGE,” or “SUBTITLE” is
not recorded on a disc, the original language is used as the
initial language.
PICTURE—MONITOR TYPE:
• There is leader tape which cannot be recorded onto at the start
and end of cassette tapes. Thus, when recording CDs or radio
broadcasts, wind the leader tape first to ensure that the
recording will be made without any music part lost.
• If you start recording with no cassette inserted, “NO TAPE”
appears on the display. If a protected tape has been inserted,
“NO REC” appears.
• When using Reverse Mode for recording, start recording in the
forward (3) direction first; otherwise, recording will stop
when only one side (reverse) of the tape is recorded.
• Even if “4:3 PS” is selected, the screen size may become 4:3
letter box with some DVD Video discs. This depends on how
the discs are recorded.
• When you select “16:9” for a picture whose aspect ratio is 4:3,
the picture slightly changes due to the process for converting
the picture width.
AUDIO—DOWN MIX:
• This setting is not effective when DTS multi-channel software
is played back.
OTHERS—ON SCREEN GUIDE:
• You can also change Reverse Mode setting (
after starting recording.
and
)
• Setup Menus and on-screen bar will be displayed (and
recorded) even though this function is set to “OFF.”
Subtitles and the information for zooming in always appear on
the display regardless of this setting.
• You cannot open or close the disc tray while recording.
Synchronized Disc Recording:
• When the tape reaches its end in the forward direction (3)
during recording with Reverse Mode set to
, the last tune
will be re-recorded at the beginning of the reverse side.
MP3/WMA/JPEG groups/tracks configuration
This System plays back the tracks as follows.
Hierarchy
Level 1
ROOT
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
9
01
03
04
10
3
7
02
4
5
6
8
11
12
05
1
2
Group with its play order
Track with its play order
01
1
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the System
Maintenance
To get the best performance of the System, keep your discs,
tapes, and mechanism clean.
• Stains should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the System is
heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-diluted
neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean with a dry
cloth.
• Since the System may deteriorate in quality, become damaged
or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the following:
– DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.
Handling discs
– DO NOT wipe it strongly.
• When removing the disc from its case, hold it at the edge while
pressing the center hole lightly.
– DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.
– DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as insecticides
to it.
• DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact for
a long time.
• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc.
• Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping.
• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc.
• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, temperature extremes, and
moisture.
To clean the disc:
Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to
edge.
Handling cassette tapes
• If the tape is loose in its cassette, take up the slack by inserting
a pencil in one of the reels and rotate it.
– If the tape is loose, it may get stretched, cut, or caught in the
cassette.
• Be careful not to touch the tape surface.
• Avoid the following places to store the tape—in dusty places,
in direct sunlight or heat, in moist areas, on a TV or speaker,
or near a magnet.
To keep the best recording and playback sound quality
• Use a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to clean the heads,
capstans, and pinch rollers.
• Use a head demagnetizer (available at electronics and audio
shops) to demagnetize the heads (when the System turned off).
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MP3/WMA or JPEG tracks are not played back.
] The inserted disc may include both type of tracks (MP3/
WMA files and JPEG files). In this case, you can only play
back the files selected by the “FILE TYPE” setting (see
page 35).
Troubleshooting
If you are having a problem with your System, check this list
for a possible solution before calling for service.
] You have changed the “FILE TYPE” setting after you
inserted a disc. In this case, reload the disc.
General:
Adjustments or settings are suddenly canceled before
“NO AUDIO” appears.
] This System cannot play back illegally produced DVD
Audio discs.
you finish.
] There is a time limit. Repeat the procedure again.
Operations are disabled.
“LR ONLY” appears.
] The built-in microprocessor may malfunction due to
external electrical interference. Unplug the AC power cord
and then plug it back in.
] Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When
you play back such a disc, this System plays back the left
front and right front signals only.
Unable to operate the System from the remote control.
] The path between the remote control and the remote sensor
on the System is blocked.
The disc sound is discontinuous.
] The disc is scratched or dirty.
] The batteries are exhausted.
The disc tray does not open or close.
] The AC power cord is not plugged in.
] Child Lock is in use (see page 23).
No sound is heard.
] Speaker connections are incorrect or loose.
] Headphones are connected.
Tape Operations:
The cassette holder cannot be opened.
] Power supply from the AC power cord has been cut off
while the tape was running. Turn on the System.
No picture appears on the screen.
] The video cord connections are incorrect or loose.
No picture is displayed on the TV, the picture is blurred,
or the picture is divided into two parts.
] The System is connected to a TV which does not support
progressive scanning.
Recordings:
Impossible to record.
The left and right edges of the picture are missing on the
screen.
] Small tabs on the back of the cassette are removed. Cover
the holes with adhesive tape.
] Select “4:3 LB” for “MONITOR TYPE” (see page 34).
Timer Operations:
Daily Timer and Recording Timer do not work.
] The System has been turned on when the on-time comes.
Timer starts working only when the System is turned off.
Radio Operations:
Hard to listen to broadcasts because of noise.
] Antennas connections are incorrect or loose.
] The AM loop antenna is too close to the System.
] The FM antenna is not properly extended and positioned.
Daily Timer does not start playback.
] The disc loaded is a DVD video. Change the disc.
] Title/group number and chapter/track number are not
entered while setting the Daily Timer. Do not skip these
steps when you want to play a disc using Daily Timer.
Disc Operations:
The disc does not play.
] The disc is placed upside down. Place the disc with the label
Setup Menu Operations:
side up.
No subtitle appears on the display though you have
selected the initial subtitle language.
] Some DVDs are programmed to always display no subtitle
initially. If this happens, select the subtitle after starting play
(see page 18).
ID3 Tag on an MP3/WMA disc cannot be shown.
] There are two types of ID3 Tag—Version 1 and Version 2.
This System can only show ID3 Tag Version 1.
MP3/WMA/JPEG groups and tracks are not played
back as you expect.
] The playing order is determined when the disc was
recorded. It depends on the writing application.
Audio language is different from the one you have
selected as the initial audio language.
] Some DVDs are programmed to always use the original
language initially. If this happens, select the audio language
after starting play (see page 19).
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Code List
JW
KA
KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
Javanese
Georgian
Kazakh
SL
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
Afar
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Ameharic
Arabic
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean (KOR)
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati
Sesotho
Sundanese
Swedish
Swahili
Tamil
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
ST
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
SU
SV
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Maori
Telugu
Tajik
Bislama
Bengali, Bangla
Tibetan
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DA
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU
FA
FI
LV
MG
MI
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Breton
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
Catalan
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE
NL
NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Danish
Bhutani
Greek
Malay (MAY)
Maltese
TT
TW
UK
UR
UZ
VI
Twi
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque
Burmese
Nauru
Ukrainian
Urdu
Nepali
Uzbek
Persian
Dutch
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Wolof
Finnish
Norwegian
Occitan
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZU
FJ
Fiji
FO
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
Faroese
Frisian
(Afan) Oromo
Oriya
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu
Irish
Panjabi
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
PL
Polish
PS
Pashto, Pushto
Portuguese
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
PT
QU
RM
RN
RO
RU
RW
SA
Hindi
HR
HU
HY
IA
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Rumanian
Russian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
IE
SD
Sindhi
IK
SG
Sangho
IN
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Yiddish
SH
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
IS
SI
IW
JI
SK
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Country/Area Codes List
√
DK
DM
DO
DZ
EC
EE
EG
EH
ER
ES
Denmark
Dominica
Dominican Republic
Algeria
Ecuador
Estonia
Egypt
Western Sahara
Eritrea
Spain
JO
JP
Jordan
Japan
Kenya
Kyrgyzstan
Cambodia
AD
AE
AF
AG
AI
AL
AM
AN
AO
AQ
AR
AS
AT
AU
AW
AZ
BA
BB
BD
BE
BF
Andorra
United Arab Emirates
Afghanistan
Antigua and Barbuda
Anguilla
Albania
Armenia
Netherlands Antilles
Angola
Antarctica
Argentina
American Samoa
Austria
Australia
KE
KG
KH
KI
KM
KN
KP
Kiribati
Comoros
Saint Kitts and Nevis
Korea, Democratic People’s
Republic of
Korea, Republic of
Kuwait
Cayman Islands
Kazakhstan
Lao People’s Democratic
Republic
KR
KW
KY
KZ
LA
ET
FI
FJ
Ethiopia
Finland
Fiji
FK
FM
FO
FR
FX
GA
GB
GD
GE
GF
GH
GI
GL
GM
GN
GP
GQ
GR
GS
Falkland Islands (Malvinas)
Micronesia (Federated States of)
Faroe Islands
France
France, Metropolitan
Gabon
United Kingdom
Grenada
Georgia
French Guiana
Ghana
Gibraltar
Greenland
Gambia
Guinea
Guadeloupe
Equatorial Guinea
Greece
South Georgia and the South
Sandwich
Guatemala
Guam
Guinea-Bissau
Guyana
Hong Kong
Heard Island and McDonald
Islands
Honduras
Croatia
Haiti
Hungary
Indonesia
Ireland
Israel
India
British Indian Ocean Territory
Iraq
Iran (Islamic Republic of)
Iceland
Italy
Jamaica
Aruba
Azerbaijan
Bosnia and Herzegovina
Barbados
Bangladesh
Belgium
Burkina Faso
Bulgaria
Bahrain
Burundi
Benin
Bermuda
Brunei Darussalam
Bolivia
Brazil
Bahamas
Bhutan
Bouvet Island
Botswana
Belarus
Belize
Canada
Cocos (Keeling) Islands
Central African Republic
Congo
Switzerland
Côte d’Ivoire
Cook Islands
Chile
Cameroon
China
Colombia
Costa Rica
Cuba
Cape Verde
Christmas Island
Cyprus
Czech Republic
Germany
Djibouti
LB
LC
LI
LK
LR
LS
LT
LU
LV
LY
MA
MC
MD
MG
MH
ML
Lebanon
Saint Lucia
Liechtenstein
Sri Lanka
Liberia
Lesotho
Lithuania
Luxembourg
Latvia
Libyan Arab Jamahiriya
Morocco
Monaco
BG
BH
BI
BJ
BM
BN
BO
BR
BS
BT
BV
BW
BY
BZ
CA
CC
CF
CG
CH
CI
CK
CL
CM
CN
CO
CR
CU
CV
CX
CY
CZ
DE
DJ
Moldova, Republic of
Madagascar
Marshall Islands
Mali
MM Myanmar
MN
MO
MP
MQ
MR
MS
MT
MU
MV
Mongolia
Macau
GT
GU
GW
GY
HK
HM
Northern Mariana Islands
Martinique
Mauritania
Montserrat
Malta
HN
HR
HT
HU
ID
IE
IL
IN
IO
IQ
IR
IS
IT
Mauritius
Maldives
MW Malawi
MX
MY
MZ
NA
NC
NE
NF
NG
NI
Mexico
Malaysia
Mozambique
Namibia
New Caledonia
Niger
Norfolk Island
Nigeria
Nicaragua
Netherlands
Norway
NL
NO
JM
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NP
NR
NU
NZ
OM
PA
PE
PF
PG
PH
PK
PL
PM
PN
PR
PT
PW
PY
QA
RE
RO
RU
RW
SA
SB
Nepal
Nauru
Niue
New Zealand
Oman
Panama
Peru
French Polynesia
Papua New Guinea
Philippines
Pakistan
Poland
Saint Pierre and Miquelon
Pitcairn
Puerto Rico
Portugal
Palau
Paraguay
Qatar
Réunion
Romania
SE
SG
SH
SI
Sweden
Singapore
Saint Helena
Slovenia
Svalbard and Jan Mayen
Slovakia
Sierra Leone
San Marino
Senegal
Somalia
Suriname
Sao Tome and Principe
El Salvador
Syrian Arab Republic
Swaziland
Turks and Caicos Islands
Chad
French Southern Territories
Togo
Thailand
Tajikistan
Tokelau
Turkmenistan
Tunisia
Tonga
TT
Trinidad and Tobago
Tuvalu
Taiwan
Tanzania, United Republic of
Ukraine
Uganda
United States Minor Outlying
Islands
United States
Uruguay
TV
TW
TZ
UA
UG
UM
SJ
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SR
ST
SV
SY
SZ
TC
TD
TF
TG
TH
TJ
US
UY
UZ
VA
VC
VE
VG
VI
VN
VU
WF
WS
YE
YT
YU
ZA
ZM
ZR
ZW
Uzbekistan
Vatican City State (Holy See)
Saint Vincent and the Grenadines
Venezuela
Virgin Islands (British)
Virgin Islands (U.S.)
Vietnam
Vanuatu
Wallis and Futuna Islands
Samoa
Yemen
Mayotte
Yugoslavia
South Africa
Russian Federation
Rwanda
Saudi Arabia
Solomon Islands
Seychelles
Sudan
TK
TM
TN
TO
TP
TR
Zambia
Zaire
Zimbabwe
SC
SD
East Timor
Turkey
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals
DIGITAL AUDIO
OUTPUT
Output Signals
Playback disc
DVD Video
STREAM/PCM
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
PCM ONLY
with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Linear PCM
with 96 kHz, Linear PCM
with Dolby Digital
with DTS
Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
DVD Audio
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with 48/96/192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit Linear PCM
with 44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz,
16/20/24 bit Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with Dolby Digital
with DTS
Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
SVCD, VCD, CD
CD with DTS
DTS bitstream
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
MP3/WMA disc
32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
*While playing some DVDs, digital signals may be emitted at 20 bits or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DVD
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal if the discs are not copy-protected.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Parts Index
Refer to the pages to see how to use the buttons and controls.
Amplifier section
Output Power:
40 W (20 W + 20 W) at 4 Ω (10% THD)
AUX: 400 mV/50 kΩ
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT:
Remote control
Audio Input
Digital output:
–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm 30 nm)
STANDBY/ON
Video output:
Color system:
VIDEO (composite):
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
1
ZOOM
4
2
DVD LEVEL
5
3
VFP
6
NTSC/PAL selectable
10
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
4 Ω – 16 Ω
17
11, 12, 14,
16, 18–21,
26, 37
CLOCK/
TIMER
REV. MODE
FM MODE
S-VIDEO: Y (luminance)
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
17, 31
C (chrominance, burst)
COMPONENT: (Y)
(PB/PR)
Speakers/Impedance:
SET
10
10
TOP MENU
MENU
SET UP
ENTER
14, 20,
25–31, 33
ON SCREEN
CANCEL
RETURN
Tuner section
FM tuning range:
DVD/CD
TAPE
10, 13, 22, 28
87.50 MHz – 108.00 MHz
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
PLAY
MODE
11, 13,
AM (MW) tuning range:
20–23, 28
531 kHz – 1 710 kHz (at 9 kHz intervals)
530 kHz – 1 710 kHz (at 10 kHz intervals)
+
GROUP/TITLE
SLOW – SLOW
BASS/
3D
15
15
DISPLAY
RHYTHM AX
PHONIC TREBLE
9, 17
14
Tape section
DIMMER
Frequency response:
Wow and flutter:
60 Hz – 14 000 Hz
0.15% (WRMS)
FADE
MUTING
10, 15
16
11, 16–20,
VOLUME
23
RM-SUXP450U REMOTE CONTROL
Disc player section
Playable disc: DVD Video/DVD Audio
CD/VCD/SVCD
15
20
CD-R/CD-RW (CD/SVCD/VCD/MP3/
WMA/JPEG format)
DVD-R/DVD-RW (Video format)
Dynamic range:
Main unit
90 dB
500 lines
Horizontal resolution:
Wow and flutter:
Immeasurable
12
Speakers
Speaker units:
Impedance:
Full-range:
10 cm cone x 1
4 Ω
Dimensions (approx.):
145 mm x 230 mm x 191 mm
(W/H/D)
8
Mass (approx.):
1.8 kg each
14
15
Remote
sensor
Supplied Accessories
See page 3.
STANDBY/ON
DVD/CD
3D
PHONIC
RHYTHM AX
AUX
10, 11
VOLUME
General
Power requirement:
Power consumption:
TAPE
FM/AM
10, 11,
15
10–13,
22, 28
AC 220 V
, 50 Hz/60 Hz
65 W (at operation)
1.3 W (on standby)
REC
DOWN
UP
30
Dimensions (approx.):
Mass (approx.):
170 mm x 230 mm x 311 mm
13, 23
10
(W/H/D)
4.8 kg
11, 13
PHONES
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
EN, CS
0504AIMMDWJEM
© 2004 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MICRO COMPONENT SYSTEM
UX-P450
—Consists of CA-UXP450 and SP-UXP450
SUPER VIDEO
INSTRUCTIONS
GVT0129-014B
[A]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warnings, Cautions and Others
CAUTION—STANDBY/ON
button!
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely (all
lamps and indications go off). The STANDBY/ON
any position does not disconnect the mains line.
button in
• When the unit is on standby, the STANDBY/ON lamp lights in
red.
• When the unit is turned on, the STANDBY/ON lamp lights in
green.
The power can be remote controlled.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.
CAUTION
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a
newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get
out.)
• Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted
candles, on the apparatus.
• When discarding batteries, environmental problems must
be considered and local rules or laws governing the
disposal of these batteries must be followed strictly.
• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or
splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as
vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user
serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified
service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and
interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED
INSIDE THE UNIT.
Caution: Proper Ventilation
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire, and to prevent damage,
locate the apparatus as follows:
1. Front: No obstructions and open spacing.
2. Sides/ Top/ Back: No obstructions should be placed in the areas
shown by the dimensions below.
3. Bottom: Place on the level surface. Maintain an adequate air
path for ventilation by placing on a stand with a height of 10 cm
or more.
15 cm
15 cm
1 cm
1 cm
15 cm
15 cm
15 cm
10 cm
SP-UXP450 CA-UXP450
SP-UXP450
CA-UXP450
G-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Introduction .....................................................2 On-Screen Disc Operations .......................... 24
Precautions ......................................................................2
How to Read This Manual...............................................2
On-screen Bar Information............................................24
Operations Using the On-screen Bar.............................25
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures.................................27
Operations on the CONTROL Screen...........................27
Getting Started.................................................3
Step 1: Unpack ................................................................3
Step 2: Prepare the Remote Control ................................3
Step 3: Hook Up ..............................................................4
Setting the Video Output Selector...................................6
Changing the Scanning Mode .........................................6
Advanced Tape Operations.......................... 29
Recording on a Tape......................................................29
Synchronized Disc Recording.......................................30
Timer Operations.......................................... 31
Before Operating the System..........................7
Playable Disc Types ........................................................7
Display Indicators............................................................8
Setting the Timer...........................................................31
Setup Menu Operations................................ 33
Operating Procedure......................................................33
Restricting the Review—Parental Lock........................37
Daily Operations—Playback ........................10
Listening to the Radio ...................................................11
Playing Back a Tape......................................................12
Playing Back a Disc.......................................................12
Additional Information................................. 39
Learning More about This System ................................39
Maintenance ..................................................................41
Troubleshooting.............................................................42
Language Code List.......................................................43
Country/Area Codes List...............................................44
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals .....................45
Specifications ................................................................46
Parts Index.....................................................................46
Daily Operations—Sound & Other
Adjustments ...................................................15
Adjusting the Volume....................................................15
Adjusting the Sound ......................................................15
Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound
Increase Level............................................................16
Changing the Display Brightness ..................................16
Changing the Picture Tone ............................................16
Setting the Clock ...........................................................17
Turning Off the Power Automatically...........................17
Unique DVD/VCD Operations .....................18
Selecting the View Angle..............................................18
Selecting the Subtitle Language ....................................18
Selecting the Audio Track.............................................19
Playing Back a Bonus Group ........................................19
Special Effect Playback.................................................20
Advanced Disc Operations............................21
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play..........21
Playing at Random—Random Play...............................22
Playing Repeatedly........................................................23
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock ........................23
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Precautions
How to Read This Manual
To make this manual as simple and easy-to-understand as
possible, we have adapted the following methods:
• Button and control operations are explained as listed in the
table below.
Installation
• Install in a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor
too cold—between 5°C and 35°C.
• Install the System in a location with adequate ventilation to
prevent internal heat buildup inside the System.
•
Some related tips and notes are explained later in the
sections “Additional Information” and
“Troubleshooting,” but not in the same section
explaining the operations. If you want to know more
about the functions, or if you have a doubt about the
functions, go to these sections and you will find the
answers.
DO NOT install the System in a location near
heat sources, or in a place subject to direct
sunlight, excessive dust or vibration.
• Leave sufficient distance between the System and the TV.
• Keep the speakers away from the TV to avoid interference
with TV.
Indicates that you press the button
briefly
.
Power sources
• When unplugging the System from the wall outlet, always
pull on the plug, not the AC power cord.
Indicates that you press the button
briefly and repeatedly until an
option you want is selected.
DO NOT handle the AC power cord with wet
hands.
Indicates that you press one of the
buttons.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lenses inside the System in
the following cases:
• After starting to heat the room
• In a damp room
• If the System is brought directly from a cold to a warm
place
Indicates that you press and hold the
button for specified seconds.
• The number inside the arrow
indicates the period of press (in this
example, 2 seconds).
2 sec.
• If no number is inside the arrow,
press and hold until the entire
procedure is complete or until you
get a result you want.
Should this occur, the System may malfunction. In this case,
leave the System turned on for a few hours until the moisture
evaporates, unplug the AC power cord, then plug it in again.
Others
Indicates that you turn the control
toward the specified direction(s).
• Should any metallic object or liquid fall into the System,
unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer before
operating any further.
DO NOT disassemble the System since there
are no user serviceable parts inside.
Indicates that this operation is only
possible using the remote control.
Remote
ONLY
• If you are not going to operate the System for an extended
period of time, unplug the AC power cord from the wall
outlet.
Indicates that this operation is only
possible using the buttons and controls on
the main unit.
Main Unit
ONLY
If anything goes wrong, unplug the AC power cord and
consult your dealer.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Step 1: Unpack
After unpacking, check to be sure that you have all the
following items. The number in parentheses indicates the
quantity of each piece supplied.
• FM antenna (1)
Step 1:Unpack the package and
check the accessories.
• AM loop antenna (1)
• Composite video cord (1)
• Remote control (1)
• Batteries (2)
If any item is missing, consult your dealer immediately.
Step 2: Prepare the Remote Control
Insert the batteries into the remote control by matching the
polarity (+ and –) correctly.
1
Step 2:Prepare the remote control.
R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F)
2
Step 3:Hook up the components such
as AM/FM antennas, speakers,
etc. (see pages 4 to 6).
3
• DO NOT use an old battery together with a
new one.
• DO NOT use different types of batteries
together.
• DO NOT expose batteries to heat or flame.
• DO NOT leave the batteries in the battery
compartment when you are not going to use
the remote control for an extended period of
time. Otherwise, the remote control will be
damaged from battery leakage.
Finally plug the AC power cord.
Now you can operate the System.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step 3: Hook Up
If you need more detailed information, see page 6.
Illustrations of the input/output terminals below are typical
examples.
When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals
since the terminal names actually printed on the rear may vary.
Before connecting optical digital
cord
Turn the power off to all components before connections.
Remove the protective
cap from the DVD
OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUT terminal.
For better FM/AM reception
AM loop antenna
Keep it connected.
Outdoor FM
antenna
(not supplied)
Vinyl-covered wire (not supplied)
Extend it horizontally.
Disconnect the supplied FM antenna, and connect to an outdoor FM
antenna using a 75 Ω wire with coaxial type connector.
VIDEO INPUT
VIDEO INPUT
Yellow
Composite video cord (supplied)
OR
S-video cord (not supplied)
OR
TV
VIDEO INPUT
Y
Green
Blue
P
B
PR
Red
Component video cord (not supplied)
AV COMPU LINK cord (not supplied)
(cord with monaural mini plug)
AV
COMPU LINK
• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control
system” on page 6.
OPTICAL
DIGITAL IN
DECODER
Optical digital cord (not supplied)
Audio cord (not supplied)
AUDIO OUT
White
Red
LEFT
RIGHT
AUX
VCR, etc.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Turn it until the best reception is
obtained.
FM antenna (supplied)
Extend it so that you can obtain the best reception.
N
E
P
O
H
S
U
P
R E V E R S E
O
T
U
A
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
SELECT
PA
L
NTSC
Y
PB
PR
To a wall outlet
Plug the AC power cord only after all connections and
selector settings on the rear are complete.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To connect the AM loop antenna
IMPORTANT
The speakers are magnetically shielded to avoid color
distortions on TVs. However, if not installed properly, it
may cause color distortions. So, pay attention to the
following when installing the speakers.
1 Hold
• When placing the speakers near a TV set, turn off the
TV’s main power switch or unplug it before installing the
speakers. Then wait at least 30 minutes before turning on
the TV’s main power switch again.
3 Release
Some TVs may still be affected even though you have
followed the above. If this happens, move the speakers
away from the TV.
2 Insert
• If the AM loop antenna wire or speaker cords are covered
with vinyl, remove the vinyl to expose the tip of the
antenna by twisting the vinyl.
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other
terminals, connecting cords and power cord.Also, keep the
antennas away from metallic parts of the System,
connecting cords, and theAC power cord. This could cause
poor reception.
AV COMPU LINK remote control system
This system allows you to use JVC’s TV with simple
operations; by starting playing back a disc, the TV
automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the
appropriate position so that you can view the playback
picture.
• To use AV COMPU LINK, you need to connect the
System and the TV by using a cord with monaural mini-
plugs (not supplied) in addition to the video input/output
connection through the COMPONENT jacks, S-VIDEO
jack or VIDEO (composite) jack on the rear.
To connect the speaker cords
Connect the right speaker to the RIGHT terminals, and the
left speaker to the LEFT terminals.
1 Hold
Setting the Video Output Selector
You can select the video output to match it to the color
system of your TV.
3 Release
NTSC: For an NTSC TV.
PAL: For a PAL TV.
2 Insert
VIDEO
OUT
SELECT
• When using a multi-color system
TV, either position will work.
• When connecting the speaker cords, match the polarity of
the speaker terminals: Red cord to (+) and black cord
to (–).
PAL
NTSC
Remote
ONLY
Changing the Scanning Mode
This System supports progressive scanning.
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to
each terminal.
• DO NOT allow the conductor of the speaker
cords to be in touch with the metallic parts of
the System.
If you connect a progressive TV through the COMPONENT
jacks, you can enjoy a high quality picture from the built-in
DVD player by selecting “PROGRE.”
PROGRESSIVE
PROGRE
0
INTER
(at the same time)
PROGRE Progressive scanning. For a progressive TV.
INTER
Interlaced scanning. For a conventional TV.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Operating the System
DVD Video—digital audio formats
The System can play back the following digital audio
Playable Disc Types
This unit has been designed to play back the following discs:
formats.
•
Linear PCM: Uncompressed digital audio, the same
format used for CDs and most studio masters.
Dolby Digital: Compressed digital audio, developed by
Dolby Laboratories, which enables multi-channel encode
to create the realistic surround sound.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems): Compressed digital
audio, developed by Digital Theater Systems, Inc., which
enables multi-channel like Dolby Digital. As the
compression ratio is lower than for Dolby Digital, it
provides wider dynamic range and better separation.
Region
Code*
Number
Video
Format
Disc Type
Mark (Logo)
•
DVD Video
DVD Audio
4
or
ALL
•
NTSC
or
PAL
Video CD
(VCD)
DIGITAL VIDEO
When playing a multi-channel encoded DVD, the System
properly converts these multi-channel signals into 2
channels, and emits the downmixed sound from the
speakers.
Super Video
CD (SVCD)
SUPER VIDEO
COMPACT
•
To enjoy the powerful sound of these multi-channel
encoded DVDs, connect a proper decoder or an amplifier
with a proper built-in decoder to the digital output terminal
on the rear.
Audio CD
DIGITAL AUDIO
CD-R
The System can play back CD-R or CD-RW
recorded in the Audio CD, Video CD, SVCD,
MP3, WMA, and JPEG formats.
CD-RW
DVD-R
The System can play back DVD-R or DVD-
RW recorded in the video format.
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “MLP Lossless”, and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• “DTS” and “DTS2.0+DIGITAL OUT” are registered
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents
and other intellectual property rights owned by
Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be authorized by
Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
DVD-RW
In addition to the above discs, this System can play back audio
data recorded on CD Text, CD-G (CD Graphics), and CD-Extra.
• The following discs cannot be played back:
DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD+R, DVD+RW, CD-I (CD-I
Ready), CD-ROM, Photo CD, etc.
Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage the
speakers.
• In this manual, “file” and “track” are interchangeably used
for MP3/WMA/JPEG operations.
* Note on Region Code
DVD players and DVDs have their own Region Code numbers.
CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH
DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY
COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY
CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE
PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 OR 625 PROGRESSIVE
SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED
THAT THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO
THE ‘STANDARD DEFINITION’ OUTPUT. IF THERE
ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR TV SET
COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p AND
625p DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR
CUSTOMER SERVICE CENTER.
This System can play back only DVDs recorded with the NTSC
or PAL color system whose Region Code numbers including
“4.”
EX.:
If a DVD with the improper Region Code numbers is loaded,
“RGN ERR (Region Code Error)” appears on the display and
playback will not start.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display Indicators
The indications on the display teach you a lot of things while you are operating the System.
Before operating the System, be familiar with when and how the indicator illuminates on the display.
1 2 3
4
5
6
7
SLEEP MONO ST MP3 WMA 3DPHONIC REC
123 REC
RANDOM
PRGM ALL BONUS B.S.P.
A.STANDBY
8
9
p
q
w
e
1 Rhythm Ax indicator
p BONUS indicator
• Lights when Rhythm Ax is activated.
• Lights when a DVD Audio with a bonus group is
2 Daily Timer indicators
detected.
•
: lights when Daily Timer stands by or is being preset.
q B.S.P. (Browsable Still Picture) indicator
• Lights when Browsable Still Pictures are detected while
playing a DVD Audio.
• 1/2/3: lights when a Daily Timer (1, 2, or 3) stands by;
flashes while setting or working.
• REC: lights when the Recording Timer stands by; flashes
while setting or working.
SLEEP indicator
w Main display
• While listening to radio: Band (or preset number) and
station frequency appear.
3
• Lights when the Sleep Timer is activated.
4 FM reception indicators
• While selecting “AUX”: “AUX” appears.
• While playing a tape: “TAPE” appears.
• While playing a disc: See “Indications on the main
display while operating a disc” on page 9.
e A(auto). STANDBY indicator
• Lights when Auto Standby is activated.
• Flashes when disc playback stops with Auto Standby
activated.
• MONO: lights while receiving an FM stereo station in
monaural.
• ST (stereo): lights while an FM stereo station with
sufficient signal strength is tuned in.
5 MP3/WMA indicators
• MP3: lights when an MP3 track is detected.
• WMA: lights when a WMA track is detected.
6 3D PHONIC indicator
• Lights when 3D Phonic is activated.
7 REC indicator
• Lights while recording.
8 Tape operation indicators
•
2 3 (tape direction):
–Lights to indicate the current tape running direction.
–Flashes slowly during playback and recording.
–Flashes quickly while rewinding a tape.
(reverse mode):
•
–
–
–
: tape play continues endlessly.
: tape automatically reverses once.
: tape play stops at the end of one side.
9Disc operation indicators
• RANDOM: lights when Random Play is activated.
• PRGM (program): lights when Program Play is activated.
•
(repeat)/ALL:
–
–
: lights when Disc Repeat is activated.
: lights when any Repeat other than the above is
ALL
activated.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indications on the main display while operating a disc
While playing back a disc:
While disc play is stopped:
• DVD Video:
• DVD Video:
Current chapter no.
Elapsed playing time
Total title no.
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current title and
chapter numbers for a few seconds.
• DVD Audio:
• DVD Audio:
Track no.
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time
Total group no.
Group no.
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group
and track numbers for a few seconds.
• Audio CD:
• Audio CD:
Current track no.
Total track no.
Total playing time
Elapsed playing time
• SVCD/VCD:
• SVCD/VCD:
Total track no.
Total playing time*
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time*
* Changes to “PBC” when stopping PBC playback.
* “PBC” appears while playing a disc with PBC.
• MP3/WMA:
• MP3/WMA:
Current track no.
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time
Current group no.
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group
and track numbers for a few seconds.
• JPEG:
• JPEG:
Current group no.
Current group no.
Current file no.
Current file no.
• If Resume is turned “ON” (see page 36), “RESUME” appears when you stop playback.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daily Operations—Playback
In this manual, the operation using the remote control
is mainly explained; however, you can use the buttons
and controls on the main unit if they have the same (or
similar) name and marks.
1
10 keys
1 Turn on the power.
The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit lights in
green.
SET
ENTER
TOP MENU
MENU
,
• Without pressing STANDBY/ON
, the System
,
,
turns on by pressing one of the source selecting
buttons in the next step.
RETURN
2
8
7
2 Select the source.
1/¡
3D PHONIC
Playback automatically starts if the selected source is
ready to start.
GROUP/TITLE
4/¢
• If you press AUX, start playback source on the
external component.
3
SHIFT
3 Adjust the volume.
4 Operate the target source as explained
later.
To turn off (stand by) the unit
STANDBY/ON
1
2
The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit
STANDBY/ON
lights in red.
• A small amount of power is always
consumed even while on standby.
For private listening
Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the
main unit. The sound will no longer come out of the
speakers. Be sure to turn down the volume before
connecting or putting the headphones.
• Disconnecting the headphones will activate the
speakers again.
DVD/CD
3
4
DO NOT turn off (stand by) the System with
the volume set to an extremely high level;
Otherwise, the sudden blast of sound can
damage your hearing, speakers and/or
headphones when you turn on the System or
start playback.
VOLUME
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
To preset the stations
You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.
Listening to the Radio
To select the band (FM or AM)
1 Tune in to a station you want to preset.
• You can also store the monaural reception mode for FM
preset stations if selected.
FM
AM
2 Activate the preset number entry mode.
SET
To tune in to a station
While FM or AM is selected...
• Finish the following process while the indication on the
display is flashing.
Remote control:
Main unit:
2 sec.
3 Select a preset number for the station you store.
2 sec.
GROUP/TITLE
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
DOWN
UP
Examples:
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
To select preset number 5, press
5.
To select preset number 15,
press +10, then 5.
To select preset number 30,
press +10, +10, then 10.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
9
7
Frequency starts changing on the display.
When a station (frequency) with sufficient signal strength is
tuned in, the frequency stops changing.
• When you repeatedly press the button, the frequency changes
step by step.
10
10
• You can also use the ¡ or 1 buttons.
To stop searching manually, press either button.
4 Store the station.
Remote
ONLY
SET
If the received FM station is hard to listen
FM MODE
9
Remote
ONLY
To tune in to a preset station
1 Select the band (FM or AM).
(at the same time)
The MONO indicator lights on the display. Reception will
improve though stereo effect is lost—Monaural reception
mode.
FM
AM
To restore the stereo effect, press the button again (the
MONO indicator goes off).
2 Select a preset number for the station you store.
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
• You can also use the ¡ or
1 buttons.
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
9
7
10
10
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To reverse the tape automatically
Playing Back a Tape
REV. MODE
To insert a tape
You can play back tapes of types I, II, and IV.
7
Push
Insert
Close
(at the same time)
Tape is played from the forward side to the
reverse side. When the reverse side is played
back, playback stops.
Tape is automatically reversed, and playback
repeats until you stop it.
With the tape side facing outside
To start:
To stop:
Tape will not be reversed. When the current
side of the tape reaches its end, playback stops.
Playing Back a Disc
To rewind tape:
IMPORTANT: Before playing a disc, make sure of the
following...
Before or after play...
GROUP/TITLE
• Turn on the TV and select an appropriate input mode on
the TV to view the pictures or on-screen displays on the
TV screen.
Rewind the tape to the right.
Rewind the tape to the left.
• For disc playback, you can change the initial setting to
your preference. See “Setup Menu Operations” on
page 33.
To change the tape running direction
If “
” appears on the TV screen when you press a
button, the disc cannot accept the operation you have
tried to do, or data required for that operation is not
recorded on the disc.
3 (forward play)
2 (reverse play)
Before operating a disc, be familiar how a disc is recorded.
• DVD Video comprises of “Titles” which includes
“
“
Chapters,” DVD Audio/MP3/WMA/JPEG comprise of
Groups” which includes “Tracks,” and CD/SVCD/VCD
comprise of only “Tracks.”
• For JPEG playback, see “Operations on the CONTROL
Screen” on page 27.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
To insert a disc
You can insert a disc while playing another source.
To select a title/group
While playing...
GROUP/TITLE
(at the same time)
• Group name appears for MP3/WMA discs.
To close the disc tray, press 0 again.
• If you press DVD/CD 3, disc tray closes automatically
and playback starts (depending on how the disc is
programmed internally).
To select a chapter/track
While playing...
• First time you press 4, you
To start:
To pause:
To stop:
GROUP/TITLE
can go back to the beginning of
the current chapter/track.
DVD/CD
To release, press
DVD/CD 3.
Remote
ONLY
To locate a particular portion
•
While playing DVD/SVCD/VCD: This System can store
the stop point, and when you start playback again by
pressing DVD/CD 3 (even while on standby), it starts
from the position where you have stopped—Resume Play.
(“RESUME” appears on the display when you stop
playback.)
While playing a disc except MP3/WMA...
+
SLOW
SLOW
–
x2
x2
x10
x10
x20
x20
x60
x60
x5
x5
To stop completely while Resume is activated, press 7
twice. (To cancel Resume, see “RESUME” on page 36.)
• When operating the System, the on-screen guide icon (see
the following table) appears on the TV.
To deactivate the on-screen guide icons, see “ON
SCREEN GUIDE” on page 36.
• No sound comes out while searching on DVD Video/
SVCD/VCD.
To return to normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
Remote
ONLY
To locate an item directly
You can select a title/chapter/track directly and start
playback.
• For DVD Video, you can select a title before starting
playback, while you can select a chapter after starting
On-screen guide icons
• During DVD Video playback, the following icons may
appear on the TV:
At the beginning of a scene containing multi-
angle views.
playback
.
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
Examples:
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
At the beginning of a scene containing multi-
audio sounds.
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10,
then 5.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
At the beginning of a scene containing multi-
subtitles.
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
8
9
7
• The following icons will be also shown on the TV to
indicate your current operation.
10
10
,
,
,
,
,
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 For SVCD/VCD with PBC:
While playing a disc with PBC, “PBC” appears on the
display.
When disc menu appears on the TV, select an item on the
menu. Playback of the selected item starts.
To use 3D Phonic
While playing...
3D
PHONIC
ACTION
OFF
DRAMA
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
THEATER
3D PHONIC
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
Examples:
(Canceled)
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10,
then 5.
• The selected mode can only be shown on the TV.
ACTION
Suitable for action movies and sports
programs.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
8
9
7
DRAMA
Creates natural and warm sound. Enjoy
movies in a relaxed mood.
10
10
THEATER Enjoy sound effects like in a major theater.
To move to the next or previous page of the current
menu:
Remote
ONLY
To play back using the disc menu
7 For DVD Video/DVD Audio:
GROUP/TITLE
Moves to the next page.
1 Show the disc menu.
MENU
SET UP
TOP MENU
Moves to the previous page.
To return to the previous menu:
2 Select an item on the disc menu.
ENTER
CANCEL
RETURN
(at the same time)
• With some discs, you can also select items by entering the
number using the 10 keys.
To cancel PBC
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
9
7
Select a track.
10
10
Stop playback.
Playback starts with the selected track.
To reactivate PBC, press 7 (twice if Resume is turned
“ON”), then press DVD/CD 3.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments
Adjusting the Volume
Remote control
You can adjust the volume level from level 0 (VOL MIN) to
level 40 (VOL MAX).
Remote control:
Main unit:
VOLUME
VFP
DVD LEVEL
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
CLOCK/
TIMER
VOLUME
SET
Remote
ONLY
,
,
,
To drop the volume in a moment
ENTER
To restore the volume, press again, or
adjust the volume level.
FADE
MUTING
BASS/TREBLE
RHYTHM AX
DISPLAY
DIMMER
SHIFT
VOLUME
+/–
Adjusting the Sound
FADE
To emphasize rhythm feeling—RHYTHM AX
This function emphasizes bass attack feeling, and also
changes the subwoofer level.
MUTING
RHYTHM AX
RHYTHMAX
OFF
(Canceled)
Main unit
To adjust the tone
You can adjust the bass and treble level from –5 to +5.
To adjust the bass
BASS/
TREBLE
TRE
BASS
Canceled
VOLUME
RHYTHM AX
VOLUME +/–
To adjust the treble
BASS/
TREBLE
TRE
BASS
Canceled
VOLUME
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound
Changing the Picture Tone
Remote
ONLY
While showing a playback picture on the TV, you can select
the preset picture tone, or adjust it and store your own taste.
Increase Level
The DVD Video sound is sometimes recorded at a lower
level than for other discs and sources. You can set the
increase level for the currently loaded DVD Video, so you
do not have to adjust the volume every time you change the
source.
To select a preset picture tone
1 While playing, display VFP setting screen.
NORMAL
GAMMA
0
0
0
0
0
0
VFP
BRIGHTNESS
CONTRAST
SATURATION
TINT
DVD LEVEL
6
NORMAL MIDDLE
5
HIGH
SHARPNESS
(at the same time)
On the TV
(at the same time)
2 Select a preset picture tone.
NORMAL Original recording level.
NORMAL
CINEMA
USER1
MIDDLE
HIGH
Output level is increased (less than “HIGH”).
USER2
Output level is increased (more than
“MIDDLE”).
NORMAL
CINEMA
Normally select this.
• Once the current DVD is ejected, this setting is canceled
and set automatically to “NORMAL.”
Suitable for a movie source.
USER1/USER2 You can adjust parameters and can
Remote
ONLY
store the settings (see below).
Changing the Display Brightness
You can dim the display window.
To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.
To adjust the picture tone
DIMMER
DIM2
DIM1
1 Select “USER1” or “USER2.”
AUTO DIM
DIM OFF
(Canceled)
• Follow steps 1 and 2 explained above.
2 Select a parameter you want to adjust.
DIM1
Dims the display.
ENTER
DIM2
Erases the display illumination.
AUTO DIM
Erases the display illumination when
disc playback starts.*
• The display illuminates when
playback stops.
GAMMA
Adjust if the neutral color is bright or
dark (–3 to +3).
* “AUTO DIM” does not work for CD/MP3/WMA.
BRIGHTNESS Adjust if the entire picture is bright
or dark (–8 to +8).
CONTRAST
Adjust if the far and near positions
are unnatural (–7 to +7).
SATURATION Adjust if the picture is whitish or
blackish (–7 to +7).
TINT
Adjust if the human skin color is
unnatural (–7 to +7).
SHARPNESS
Adjust if the picture is indistinct
(–8 to +8).
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Adjust the parameter.
Turning Off the Power
Remote
ONLY
ENTER
Automatically
To turn off the unit after playback is over—Auto
Standby
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 to adjust other parameters.
On
To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.
Canceled
Remote
ONLY
Setting the Clock
(at the same time)
Without setting the built-in clock, you cannot use Daily
Timers, Recording Timer (see page 31) and Sleep Timer.
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL
or CLOCK/TIMER. You can return to the previous step.
When Auto Standby is in use, the A.STANDBY indicator
lights on the display.
When disc play stops, the A.STANDBY indicator starts
flashing. If no operation is done for about 3 minutes while
the indicator is flashing, the System turns off (stands by)
automatically.
1 Activate the clock setting mode.
CLOCK/
TIMER
• Auto Standby does not work while you are listening to
radio (FM/AM) and the external component (AUX).
To turn off the unit after a certain period of time
—Sleep Timer
• If you have already adjusted the clock before, press the
button repeatedly until the clock setting mode is
selected.
1 Specify the time (in minutes).
SLEEP
2 Adjust the hour.
A.STANDBY
SET
10 20 30 60 90 120 150
Canceled
2 Wait until the set time goes off.
3 Adjust the minute.
To check the time remaining until the shut-off time
SET
SLEEP
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
Now the built-in clock starts working.
• If you press the button repeatedly, you can change the shut-
off time.
To check the current clock time during play
DISPLAY
Clock
Source information
• While playing a DVD and MP3/WMA, you cannot check
the current clock time (see page 9) .
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unique DVD/VCD Operations
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the View Angle
Remote control
While playing back a chapter (of DVD Video) containing
multi-view angles, you can view the same scene from
different angles.
• You can also select the multi-view angles using the on-
screen bar (see page 24).
SUB TITLE
ANGLE
AUDIO
ZOOM
While playing...
10 keys
ANGLE
3
,
,
,
ENTER
DVD/CD 3
8
(at the same time)
7
Ex.:
SLOW –/+
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
2
3
SHIFT
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
2
3
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Subtitle Language
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter (of DVD
Video) containing subtitles in different languages, you can
select the subtitle language to display on the TV.
For SVCD: While playing, you can select the subtitles even
if no subtitles are recorded on the disc.
• You can also select the subtitle language using the on-
screen bar (see page 24).
While playing a DVD Video...
1 Display the subtitle selection window.
1/3
ENGLISH
1/3
SUB TITLE
ENGLISH
2
(at the same time)
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select the subtitle language.
While playing a DVD Video...
Ex.:
1/3
2/3
3/3
ENGLISH
FRENCH
JAPANESE
Ex.:
1/3
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
ENGLISH
1/3
2/3
3/3
ENGLISH
FRENCH
JAPANESE
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
While playing a DVD Audio...
Ex.:
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
2
3
While playing an SVCD video...
While playing a Karaoke SVCD or VCD...
SUB TITLE
SVCD
AUDIO
ST1
R2
ST2
L1
2
1
L2
R1
VCD
ST
L
R
(at the same time)
(at the same time)
–/4
OFF
1/4
1
2/4
2
ST1/ST2 To listen to normal stereo (2 channel)
ST
playback.
4/4
3/4
L1/L2/L
To listen to the left audio channel.
4
3
R1/R2/R To listen to the right audio channel.
• SVCD can have 4 audio channels. Karaoke SVCD usually
uses these 4 channels to record two 2-channel recordings
(ST1/ST2).
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Audio Track
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter containing
audio languages, you can select the language to listen to.
For DVD Audio: While playing back a track containing
audio channels, you can select the audio channel to listen to.
For Karaoke SVCD/VCD: When playing back a track, you
can select the audio channel to play.
Remote
ONLY
Playing Back a Bonus Group
Some DVD Audios have a special group called “bonus
group” whose contents are not open to the public.
• To play back a bonus group, you have to enter the specific
“key number” (a kind of password) for the bonus group.
The way of getting the key number depends on the disc.
• You can also select the audio track using the on-screen bar
(see page 24).
1 Select the bonus group.
AUDIO
• The bonus group is usually recorded as the last group
(for example, if a disc contains 4 groups including a
bonus group, “group 4” is the bonus group).
• For how to select the group, see “To select a title/group”
on page 13.
1
(at the same time)
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Enter the key number.
2 Select slow motion speed.
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
+
SLOW
SLOW
–
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ENTER
Forward slow motion starts.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
Reverse slow motion* starts.
+
SLOW
SLOW
1/32
1/32
1/16
1/16
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
1/2
3
Follow the interactive instructions shown on the
screen.
–
To cancel the key number entry, press 7.
*Not available for SVCD/VCD.
Remote
ONLY
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
Special Effect Playback
Still picture playback
To replay the previous scenes
(One-Touch Replay)
To start still picture play- To resume normal
back:
• This function is only used while playing DVD Video.
While playing back...
playback:
While playing...
The playback position moves
back about 10 seconds before the
current position (only within the
same title).
DVD/CD
Frame-by-frame playback
Remote
ONLY
Zoom
1 While playing...
1 While playing back...
Still picture playback starts.
ZOOM
4
2 Advance the still picture frame by frame.
(at the same time)
ZOOM
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
ZOOM 1
ZOOM 2
ZOOM 3
ZOOM 4
ZOOM 5
4
ZOOM OFF
ZOOM 6
Slow-motion playback
1 While playing...
2 Move the zoomed-in position.
Still picture playback starts.
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding
SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Disc Operations
Programming the Playing Order—
Remote control
Remote
ONLY
Program Play
You can arrange the playing order of the chapters or tracks
(up to 99) before you start playback.
1 Before starting playback, activate Program Play.
PLAY
10 keys
MODE
PROGRAM
RANDOM
Canceled
ENTER
,
CANCEL
7
DVD/CD 3
PRGM
8
PLAY
On the display
MODE
4
/
¢
REPEAT
REPEAT A-B
PROGRAM
No Group/Title
1
2
3
Track/Chapter
SHIFT
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
USE NUMERIC KEYS TO PROGRAM TRACKS.
USE CANCEL TO DELETE THE PROGRAM.
On the TV
2 Select chapters or tracks you want for Program Play.
• For DVD/MP3/WMA:
Main unit
1 Select a title or group number.
2 Select a chapter or track number.
3 Repeat the above steps 1 and 2.
• For SVCD/VCD/CD:
1 Select tracks.
To enter the numbers directly:
Examples:
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
To enter number 5, press 5.
To enter number 15, press +10,
then 5.
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
To enter number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
9
7
10
10
DVD/CD 3
, 7,
4
¢
0
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
3 Start playback.
Playing at Random—Random Play
You can play all chapters or tracks at random.
• Random Play cannot be used for some DVDs.
Playback starts in the order you
have programmed.
DVD/CD
1 Before starting playback, activate Random Play.
PLAY
MODE
To skip a step:
To pause:
To stop:
PROGRAM
RANDOM
GROUP/TITLE
Canceled
To release, press
DVD/CD 3.
RANDOM
To check the programmed contents
Before or after playback...
2 Start playback.
In the reverse order.
Playback starts in random order.
Random Play ends when the
entire disc has been played.
DVD/CD
In the programmed order.
To skip a chapter/
track:
To pause:
To stop:
• You can also use 4 or ¢ to check the programmed
contents.
To modify the program
Before or after playback...
To release, press
DVD/CD 3.
To erase the last step:
To erase the entire
program:
CANCEL
RETURN
To exit from Random Play
Before or after playback...
PLAY
MODE
PROGRAM
RANDOM
To add steps in the program:
Repeat step 2.
Canceled
To exit from Program Play
Before or after playback...
PLAY
MODE
PROGRAM
RANDOM
Canceled
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
A-B Repeat
Playing Repeatedly
You can repeat playback of a desired portion by specifying
the beginning (point A) and the ending (point B).
• A-B Repeat cannot be used for MP3/WMA and for some
DVDs.
• You can also select the repeat mode using the on-screen
bar (see page 25).
• A-B Repeat can be used within the same title while playing
a DVD Video, and within the same track for the other
discs.
Repeat Play
You can repeat playback.
• For DVD Video:
While playing...
1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), select
REPEAT A-B
the start point (A).
*
REPEAT
REP CHAP
REP TTL
starts flashing on the
REP OFF
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
display.
(Canceled)
A-
•
appears on the TV
if the TV is turned on.
• For DVD Audio:
While playing or before playback...
(at the same time)
REPEAT A-B
*
REPEAT
REP TRK
REP GRP
2 Select the end point (B).
REP OFF
(Canceled)
stops flashing.
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
A-B
•
appears on the
• For MP3/WMA:
While playing or before playback...
TV.
REPEAT A-B
• You can search for the end
point using the ¡ button.
REPEAT
*
REP TRK
REP GRP
REP ALL
(at the same time)
REP OFF
(Canceled)
To cancel A-B Repeat, press REPEAT A-B again while
holding SHIFT.
• For CD/SVCD/VCD:
While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD) or before
playback...
• A-B Repeat will also be canceled when you stop play or
skip the chapter or track.
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
*
REP ALL
REP TRK
Main Unit
ONLY
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock
REP OFF
(Canceled)
You can lock the disc tray so that no one can eject the loaded
disc.
• This is possible while the System is on standby.
REP CHAP* Repeats the current chapter.
REP TTL Repeats the current title.
REP TRK* Repeats the current track.
REP GRP Repeats the current group.
REP ALL Repeats the disc or program.
While the disc tray is closed...
*During Program Play and Random Play, “REP STEP”
appears instead of these indications, and repeat modes
change as follows for all the discs.
(at the same time)
REP STEP
REP ALL
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.
“UNLOCKED” appears on the display.
REP OFF
(Canceled)
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On-Screen Disc Operations
On-screen Bar Information
Remote control
You can check the disc information (except for MP3/WMA/
JPEG disc) and use some functions through the on-screen
bar.
ZOOM
10 keys
1 Disc type
2 Playback information
Indication
Mbps
Meanings
Current transfer rate
(Megabits per second)
ENTER
,
,
,
ON SCREEN
CANCEL
TITLE
CHAP
2
3
DVD/CD 3
8
Current title
7
REPEAT
¡
Current chapter
Current group
Current track
Time indications
4
/
¢
GROUP
1
TRACK 14
TOTAL1:25:58
SHIFT
3 Operation modes
Indication
Meanings
Playback
/
/
Forward/Reverse search
Forward/Reverse slow-motion
On-screen bars
DVD Video
Pause
Stop
1
2
3
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
4 Function icons (on the pull-down menu)
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
TRACK
1
/3/1
1/
3
1
Indication
Meanings
TIME
Select to change the time indication.
4
DVD Audio
OFF
Select to repeat playback.
Select for time search.
Select for chapter search.
Select for track search.
1
2
3
3
3
3
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
DVD-AUDIO
CHAP.
TIME
OFF
1/
3
1/
3
PAGE
TRACK
4
SVCD
Select to change the audio language or
channel (see also page 19).
1/3
1/3
1
2
Select to change subtitle language
(see also page 18).
TRACK
3
TIME
00:58
SVCD
TIME
O
F
F
S
T
1
-/
4
Select to change the view angle (see
also page 18).
1/3
4
4
VCD
1
2
Select to change the page.
PAGE 1 / 5
TRACK
3
TIME
00:58
VCD
TIME
O
F
F
S
T
CD
1
2
TRACK
3
TIME
00:58
CD
TIME
O
F
F
4
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Operations Using the On-screen Bar
For detailed operations of the following functions, see
also “Operations Using the On-screen Bar” on the left.
Ex.: Selecting a subtitle (French) for DVD Video
While a disc is selected as the source...
To change the time information
You can change the time information in the on-screen bar
and the display window on the main unit.
1 Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
ON SCREEN
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pull-
down menu.
8.5Mbps
TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TIME 0:00:58
DVD-VIDEO
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
DVD-VIDEO
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3
1
/
3
1
/1
TIME
2 Make sure
is selected (highlighted).
Goes off
3 Change the time indication.
2 Select (highlight) the item you want.
ENTER
REM 0:11:23
TOTAL 1:01:58
TIME 0:00:58
T.REM 0:35:24
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
REM
Elapsed playing time of the current
chapter/track.
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
3 Display the pop-up window.
Remaining time of the current chapter/
track.
ENTER
T
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
3
TIME 0:00:58
TOTAL
T.REM
Elapsed disc time.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
Remaining disc time.
ENGLISH
To erase the on-screen bar
4 Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
ON SCREEN
T
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
3
TIME 0:00:58
1
/3/1
2
/
3
1
FRENCH
Repeat Play
• See also page 23.
5 Finish the setting.
1 While playing a disc (without PBC for SVCD/VCD),
display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD Video: Repeat Play can be selected
before starting playback.
Pop-up window goes off.
ENTER
2 Select
.
OFF
3 Display the pop-up window.
To erase the on-screen bar
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
ON SCREEN
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
OFF
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Select the repeat mode you want.
Time Search
You can move to a particular point by specifying the elapsed
playing time from the beginning.
A-B
Repeats a desired portion (see below).
TITLE
GROUP
ALL
Repeats the current title.
Repeats the current group.
1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display
the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD: Time Search can be used before
starting playback.
Repeats the disc (except for DVD) or
program.
CHAPTER
TRACK*
OFF
*
Repeats the current chapter.
Repeats the current track.
Cancels Repeat Play.
2 Select
.
3 Display the pop-up window.
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
*During Program Play and Random Play, “STEP”
appears.
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
TIME _ : _ _ : _ _
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
5 Finish the setting.
4 Enter the time.
You can specify the time in hours/minutes/seconds.
ENTER
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
Examples:
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
To move to a point of 1
(hours): 02 (minutes): 00
(seconds), press 1, 0, 2, 0, then
0.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
A-B Repeat
• See also page 23.
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
To move to a point of 54
(minutes): 00 (seconds), press
0, 5, 4, 0, then 0.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pull-
down menu.
2 Select
.
OFF
• It is always required to enter the hour digit (even “0”
hour), but it is not required to enter trailing zeros (the
last two digits in the examples above).
3 Display the pop-up window.
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
• To correct a misentry, press Cursor
entry.
<
to erase the last
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
OFF
5 Finish the setting.
4 Select “A-B.”
The System starts playing the disc
from the selected playing time.
ENTER
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
1/3/1
1/
3
1
A–B
5 Select the start point (A).
Chapter/Track Search
You can search for the chapter (DVD Video) or track (DVD
Audio) number to play.
ENTER
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
C
H
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
A-
CHAP.
1
/3
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pull-
down menu.
6 Select the end point (B).
CHAP.
TRACK
2 Select
or
.
A-B Repeat starts. The selected
portion plays repeatedly.
• Before pressing ENTER, you can
search for the end point using the
¡ button.
ENTER
3 Display the pop-up window.
8.5Mbps
T
I
TL
E
2
3
TIME 0:00:58
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
CHAPTER
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
_
To cancel A-B Repeat, repeat steps 1 to 3, and select “OFF”
in step 4.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
4 Enter the desired chapter/track number.
Operations on the CONTROL Screen
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
Examples:
To select chapter/track 5, press
5.
To select chapter/track 15,
press 1, then 5.
The CONTROL screen automatically appears on the TV
when you load an MP3, WMA, or JPEG disc.
You can search for and play the desired tracks through the
CONTROL screen.
• If both types of files (MP3/WMA files and JPEG files) are
recorded on a disc, select the file type to play (see page 35).
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
To select chapter/track 30,
press 3, then 0.
CONTROL screen
Ex.: When the MP3 disc is loaded.
6
• To correct a misentry, press the 10 keys until the
desired number shown in the pop-up window.
7
8
5 Finish the setting.
REPEAT TRACK Time : 00:00:14
1
The System starts playing the
Group : 2 / 3
Track : 5 / 14 (Total 41)
ENTER
9
searched chapter or track.
Spring
Summer
Fall
Cloudy.mp3
Fair.mp3
Fog.mp3
Hail.mp3
Indian summer.mp3
Rain.mp3
Shower.mp3
Snow.mp3
Thunder.mp3
Typhoon.mp3
Wind.mp3
2
3
Winter
Track Information
0
-
Title
Rain
Artist
Remote
4
5
ONLY
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures
Album
Winter sky.mp3
While playing back a track (of DVD Audio) linked to
browsable still pictures (BSP), you can select the still picture
(turn the page) to be shown on the TV.
• If a track is linked to browsable still pictures (BSP), they
are usually shown in turn automatically during playback.
1 Current group number/total group number
2 Current group (in blue)
3 Group list
4 Track information (ID3 Tag Version 1.0: only for
MP3/WMA)
5 Current track (in blue)
6 Repeat Play setting
7 Elapsed playing time of the current track
(only for MP3/WMA)
1 While playing a DVD Audio, display the on-screen
bar with the pull-down menu.
2 Select
.
PAGE 1 / 5
3 Display the pop-up window.
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
1/ 1/
DVD-AUDIO
TIME
8 Operation mode icon
OFF
3
5
TRACK
PAGE
9 Current track number/total number of tracks in the
current group (total number of tracks on the loaded
disc)
0 Highlight (green) bar
- Track list
1
4 Select a still picture you want.
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
1/ 3/
DVD-AUDIO
TIME
OFF
3
5
TRACK
PAGE
3
5 Finish the setting.
ENTER
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To move the highlight (green) bar between group list and
track list:
To repeat slide-show for JPEG
While playing or before starting playback...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
Moves the bar to the track
list.
REP GRP
REP ALL
REP OFF
(Canceled)
Moves the bar to the group
list.
REP GRP Repeats the current group.
REP ALL Repeats the disc.
To select a group/track in the list:
Move the highlight bar to a desired
item.
• For Repeat Play of MP3/WMA, see page 23.
• If you move the highlight bar
while playing back an MP3/
WMA disc, the selected track
starts playback automatically.
To zoom in the still picture
• You cannot zoom in the still picture during slide-show.
1 While playing back a still picture...
• During slide-show, press 8 to display the still picture,
then...
To start playback
For MP3/WMA:
ZOOM
4
Playback starts with the selected
track.
ENTER
• Pressing DVD/CD 3 also starts
playback.
(at the same time)
ZOOM
For JPEG:
ZOOM 1
ZOOM 2
4
The selected track (still picture)
is displayed until you change it.
ZOOM OFF
ENTER
2 Move the zoomed-in position.
Slide-show playback starts.
Each track (still picture) is
shown on the screen for about 3
seconds, then changes one after
another.
DVD/CD
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding
• Once you start playing back a JPEG track, the CONTROL
SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.
screen goes off.
• To cancel slide-show, and display the current still picture,
press 8.
To skip a track:
To stop playback:
GROUP/TITLE
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Tape Operations
IMPORTANT
It may be unlawful to record or play back copyrighted
Remote control
material without the consent of the copyright owner.
Recording on a Tape
You can use type I tapes for recording.
• To play a tape, see page 12.
REV. MODE
1 Insert a recordable cassette.
Push
Insert
Close
TAPE 2 3
FM/AM
AUX
DVD/CD
3
7
With the tape side facing outside
2 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
SHIFT
settings on the display.
Reverse mode indicator
Tape direction indicator
Current source
Main unit
To change the direction
3 (forward)
2 (reverse)
PUSH OPEN 0
To change the Reverse mode if necessary
REV. MODE
7
(at the same time)
TAPE 2 3
FM/AM
AUX
To record on both sides.
DVD/CD
3
• When using Reverse Mode, start
recording in the forward (3) direction.
REC
(
)
7
To record on only one side.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Select and start playing the source—“FM,” “AM,”
“DVD/CD,” or “AUX.”
To record Program Play or Random Play
1 Select Program Play (and make a program) or Random
Play, but do not start playback.
• When recording a disc, you can also use “Synchronized
Disc Recording” (see below).
2 Press REC to start recording.
• When disc play stops, recording continues. It is
required that recording be stopped manually.
4 Start recording.
REC
To record only your favorite track
You can specify tracks to be recorded on the tape while
listening to a disc (except for DVD Video).
On the main unit
1 Start playing a disc.
To stop recording:
DVD/CD
2 While a track you want to record on the tape is
playing...
Synchronized Disc Recording
You can start and stop both disc play and tape recording at
the same time.
The disc player returns to the
REC
beginning of that track and the
track is recorded on the tape.
After recording the track, the
disc player and cassette deck
To record the entire disc
On the main unit
automatically stop.
1 Load a disc and insert a recordable cassette.
• If the current playing source is not the disc player, press
DVD/CD 3, then 7.
3 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to record other tracks you want.
• You can exchange the discs if necessary.
2 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
settings on the display.
To protect your recording
Cassettes have two small tabs on the back to protect
from unexpected erasure or re-recording.
To protect your recording, remove these tabs.
• See step 2 of “Recording on a Tape” on page 29.
3 Start recording.
The System automatically
REC
creates 4-second blanks between
the tunes recorded on the tapes.
On the main unit
To re-record on a protected tape, cover the holes with
adhesive tape.
• When either disc play* or recording ends, both disc player
and the cassette deck stop at the same time.
• If you press REC soon after the recording is stopped, “NO
REC” may appear.
* For DVD Video: When a title is finished playing.
To record a “Live” disc
It will not be desirable to put 4-second blank portions
between the tunes recorded on the tape.
To record the entire disc without any interruption
recorded, pause the disc play (press DVD/CD 3, then 8)
before pressing REC.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer Operations
Remote
ONLY
Setting the Timer
Remote control
Using Daily Timer, you can wake up with your favorite
song. On the other hand, with Recording Timer, you can
make a tape of a radio broadcast automatically.
• You can store three Daily Timer settings and one
Recording Timer setting; however, you can activate only
one of Daily Timers and Recording Timer at the same time.
• To exit from the timer setting, press CLOCK/TIMER as
required.
STANDBY/ON
CLOCK/
TIMER
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL.
You can return to the previous step.
SET
,
1 Select one of the timer setting modes you want to set—
Daily 1 ON time, Daily 2 ON time, Daily 3 ON time, or
Recording Timer ON time.
CANCEL
Daily 1 Timer
Daily 2 Timer
Daily 3 Timer
CLOCK/
TIMER
DAILY 1*
ON (Time)
DAILY 2
*
ON (Time)
DAILY 3
*
ON (Time)
ON (Time)
Canceled
Clock setting
REC TMR
(see page 17)
Recording Timer
1
Ex. When Daily Timer 1 setting mode is selected
2 Make the timer setting as you want.
Repeat the following operations until you finish setting in
the following order—
SET
For Daily Timers:
1
2
3
Set the hour then the minute for on-time.
Set the hour then the minute for off-time.
Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”
“TUNER AM,” “TAPE,” “DISC,” or “AUX.”
1
* Daily Timer initial settings when shipped from the
factory
4
For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a
preset channel.
• DAILY 1:ON Time (6:00)/OFF Time (8:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
• DAILY 2:ON Time (12:00)/OFF Time (14:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
• DAILY 3:ON Time (18:00)/OFF Time (20:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
For “DISC”: Select the title/group number, then
the chapter/track number.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Select the volume level.
•You can select the volume level (“VOL 0” to
“VOL 50” and “VOL – –”).
If you select “VOL – –,” the volume is set to the last
level when the unit has been turned off.
How Recording Timer actually works
When Recording Timer has been set, Timer (
indicator and the REC indicator are lit on the display.
Recording Timer works only once.
)
Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information
appears in sequence.
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station or
changes the source to “AUX”, sets the volume level to the
preset level, and starts recording.
For Recording Timer:
1
2
3
Set the hour then the minute for on-time.
Set the hour then the minute for off-time.
Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”
“TUNER AM,” or “AUX.”
When the off-time comes
The System stops recording, and turns off (stands by).
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change
it.
4
For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a
preset channel.
Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information
appears in sequence.
To turn off the Timer after its setting is done
Since Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday,
you may need to cancel it on some particular days.
• Recording Timer can also be canceled temporarily.
3 Turn off the unit (on standby) if you have set the timer
with the System turned on.
STANDBY/ON
1 Select the Timer you want to cancel.
Daily 1 Timer
Daily 2 Timer
Daily 3 Timer
CLOCK/
TIMER
DAILY 1*
ON (Time)
DAILY 2
*
ON (Time)
DAILY 3
*
ON (Time)
ON (Time)
Canceled
Clock setting
REC TMR
(see page 17)
Recording Timer
How Daily Timer actually works
1
Ex.To cancel Daily
Timer 1
Once the Daily Timer has been set, the timer (
)
indicator and timer number indicator (1/2/3) are lit on the
display. Daily Timer is activated at the same time
everyday until the timer is turned off manually (see the
next column) or another timer is activated.
2 Turn off the selected Timer.
To turn on the Timer
CANCEL
RETURN
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, starts playing the specified source
(except “AUX”), and sets the volume level to the preset
level.
• While Daily Timer is working, the timer (
and timer number indicator (1/2/3) flash on the display.
1 Select the Timer (DAILY 1/2/3, and REC TMR) you
want to activate.
) indicator
Daily 1 Timer
Daily 2 Timer
Daily 3 Timer
CLOCK/
TIMER
When the off-time comes
The System stops playback, and turns off (stands by)
automatically.
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change
DAILY 1
ON (Time)
DAILY 2
ON (Time)
DAILY 3
ON (Time)
REC TMR
ON (Time)
Canceled
Clock setting
(see page 17)
Recording Timer
it.
2 Activate the selected Timer.
SET
1
Ex. When Daily Timer 1 (DAILY 1) is
activated
3 Wait until the indication goes off.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Menu Operations
.
Remote
ONLY
Operating Procedure
Remote control
You can use the Setup Menus only when a disc is selected
as the source and its playback is not yet started.
Ex.: Selecting “STILL PICTURE” for “FILE TYPE”:
1 Display the Setup Menu.
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
MENU
SET UP
10 keys
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
SET UP
ENTER
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
,
,
,
(at the same time)
2 Select one of the Setup Menus.
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
AUDIO
SHIFT
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
3 Select the item you want to adjust.
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
Setup Menu Icons
AUDIO
The icon for the selected Setup Menu will be
highlighted.
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
4 Display the pop-up window.
Ex.: LANGUAGE Setup Menu is selected.
PICTURE
ENTER
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
1
2
3
4
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
AUDIO
AUDIO
STILL PICTURE
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT . USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
5 Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
AUDIO
AUDIO
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
STILL PICTURE
SELECT
ENTER
USE USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO SELECT
.
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
1 LANGUAGE Setup Menu
2 PICTURE Setup Menu
3 AUDIO Setup Menu
4 OTHERS Setup Menu
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Finish the setting.
SUBTITLE
ENTER
Some discs have multiple subtitle languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43) or “OFF (no subtitle).”
7 Repeat steps 3 to 4 to set other items on the same
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
Setup Menu.
Select one of the languages shown on the TV from—
ENGLISH, CHINESE and SPANISH.
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set other items on another Setup
Menu.
To exit from the Setup Menu
PICTURE Setup Menu
You can select the desired options concerning a picture or
monitor screen.
MENU
SET UP
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
(at the same time)
AUDIO
LANGUAGE Setup Menu
You can select the initial languages for disc playback. You
can also select the language shown on the TV screen while
operating this System.
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
MONITOR TYPE
LANGUAGE
Select the monitor type of your TV to play DVD Video
recorded with aspect ratio of 16:9.
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
For the multi-color system TV
When you use a multi-color system TV, you can change the
color system of the System automatically by selecting
“MULTI” options for the monitor type. In this case, the color
system of the System is changed to match to that of the
loaded disc regardless of the VIDEO OUT SELECT setting
(see page 6).
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
MENU LANGUAGE
Some discs have multiple menu languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43).
Select one of the following:
16:9 / 16:9 MULTI
:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 16:9 (wide
TV).
AUDIO LANGUAGE
4:3 LB (Letter Box) / 4:3 MULTI LB:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3
(conventional TV). While viewing a wide screen
picture, the black bars appear on the top and the bottom
of the screen.
Some discs have multiple audio languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43).
4:3 PS (Pan Scan) / 4:3 MULTI PS:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3. While
viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not
appear; however, the left and right edges of the pictures
will not be shown on the screen.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO Setup Menu
You can adjust the sound settings of the System.
AUDIO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
DOWN MIX
STREAM/PCM
DOLBY SURROUND
AUTO
Ex.: 16:9
Ex.: 4:3 LB
Ex: 4:3 PS
D. RANGE COMPRESSION
PICTURE SOURCE
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting an
appropriate option—picture source type (either video source
or film source).
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
When using the digital output terminal on the rear, set this
correctly according to the connected component.
Select one of the following:
AUTO: Normally select this.
When playing back a disc containing both video
and film sources, the System automatically
changes the processing to match it to the picture
type (film or video source) of the current chapter.
Select one of the following:
PCM ONLY:
To connect to a linear PCM digital
equipment such as an MD recorder.
FILM: To play a film source disc.
VIDEO: To play a video source disc.
DOLBYDIGITAL To connect to a Dolby Digital decoder
/PCM:
or an amplifier with a built-in Dolby
Digital decoder.
STREAM/PCM: To connect to a DTS decoder or an
amplifier with a built-in DTS decoder.
SCREEN SAVER
You can activate or deactivate screen saver while operating
the built-in disc player.
• See also “DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals” on
page 45.
Select one of the following:
ON:
The pictures on the TV becomes dark when no
operation is done for about 5 minutes.
DOWN MIX
When playing a multi-channel DVD, the System converts
the signals into 2 channels.
OFF:
To cancel the screen saver.
Downmix setting is effective for the speaker output (and
digital audio output if “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” is set
to “PCM ONLY”) from this System.
FILE TYPE
If both audio tracks (MP3 or WMA files) and still picture
(JPEG files) are recorded on a disc, you can select which to
play.
Select one of the following:
DOLBY
SURROUND: Pro Logic decoder.
STEREO: To connect a conventional stereo
amplifier, receiver, MD player, TV, etc.
To connect an amplifier with the Dolby
Select one of the following:
AUDIO:
To play MP3/WMA files.
STILL PICTURE: To play JPEG files.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. RANGE COMPRESSION
ON SCREEN GUIDE
You can activate or deactivate the on-screen guide icons (see
page 13).
• When recording the picture on a VCR, select “OFF” to
avoid recording the guide icons on your video tape.
You can compress the dynamic range (the difference
between the loudest sound and the softest sound) to enjoy a
powerful sound even at a low volume level when listening to
Dolby Digital software. This is useful at night.
• The effectiveness varies depends on software.
Select one of the following:
Select one of the following:
ON:
To activate the on-screen guide icons.
To cancel the on-screen guide icons.
AUTO: To enjoy powerful sounds with full dynamic
OFF:
range.
ON:
Best for watching a movie at a low volume level.
AV COMPULINK MODE
When connecting the System to a JVC’s TV with the AV
COMPU LINK remote control system, select the proper
setting.
OTHERS Setup Menu
You can change some other convenient functions.
Select one of the following:
DVD1: To connect to the VIDEO-3 Input jacks on the
OTHERS
TV.
RESUME
ON
ON
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
DVD2: To connect to the VIDEO-1 Input jacks on the
DVD1
TV.
DVD3: To connect to the VIDEO-2 Input jacks on the
TV.
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control
system” on page 6.
RESUME
PARENTAL LOCK
You can activate or deactivate Resume for disc playback
Select this to enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
See the section that follows.
(see page 13).
Select one of the following:
ON:
To activate Resume.
To cancel Resume.
OFF:
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Select “COUNTRY CODE,” then display the pop-up
Restricting the Review
window.
Remote
ONLY
—Parental Lock
PARENTAL LOCK
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
A
AN
AO
O
AQ
ENTER
_
You can restrict playback of DVD Video containing violent
scenes and those unsuitable for your family members. Once
you have set the rating level, such violent scenes (for which
a higher level than you set is assigned) may be skipped or
changed to another scene (depending on how the disc is
programmed).
AR
AS
AT
AU
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
6 Select the country code of your area.
• See “Country/Area Codes List” on page 44 to find your
country code.
To set Parental Lock
Set the rating level—Level 1 (most restrictive) to Level 8
(least restrictive).
ENTER
1 Display the Setup Menu.
LANGUAGE
MENU
SET UP
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
The System automatically enters “SET LEVEL” mode.
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
7 Make sure “SET LEVEL” is selected, then display the
SELECT
USE
pop-up window.
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
ENTER
ENTER
PARENTAL LOCK
(at the same time)
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
U
NONE
8
N
7
6
_
5
4
3
2 Select the OTHERS Setup Menus.
OTHERS
RESUME
ON
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
ON
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
DVD1
8 Set the rating level (NONE, 8 – 1).
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
ENTER
3 Select “PARENTAL LOCK.”
OTHERS
RESUME
ON
ON
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
DVD1
The System automatically enters “PASSWORD” entry
mode.
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
9 Make sure “PASSWORD” is selected, then enter any
4-digit number for your password.
4 Enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
ENTER
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
PARENTAL LOCK
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
AU
ENTER
NONE
_
_
_
_
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
SELECT
ENTER
USE
TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
10 Finish the setting.
ENTER
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the setting
To release Parental Lock temporarily
When you set a strict rating level, some discs may not be
played back at all. When you try to play such a disc, the
following screen appears on the TV.
1 Display the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
• Follow steps 1 to 4 of “To set Parental Lock.”
PARENTAL LOCK
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
AU
4
PARENTAL LOCK
TEMPORARY RELEASE
NOT RELEASE
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
PASSWORD
SELECT
ENTER
PASSWORD? ••• PRESS
0
~
9
KEYS
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
“PASSWORD” is automatically selected.
• You cannot select any item other than “EXIT” until you
enter the correct password.
SELECT
ENTER
PASSWORD? ••• PRESS
0
~
9
KEYS
2 Enter your password.
1 Select “TEMPORARY RELEASE,” then ENTER.
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
“PASSWORD” is
ENTER
automatically selected.
ENTER
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
• If you enter a wrong password, “– – – –” appears again.
If you missed three times, “EXIT” is automatically
selected. In this case, press ENTER to exit from the
PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
• If you do not play back such a disc, select “NOT
RELEASE,” then ENTER. Then eject the disc.
2 Enter your password.
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
• If you forget your password, enter “8888.”
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
3 Change the settings.
ENTER
• Follow steps 5 to 8 of “To set Parental Lock.”
4 Enter your password again (after selecting
REV. MODE
FM MODE
“PASSWORD” manually if necessary).
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
1
ZOOM
4
3
VFP
6
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ENTER
• If you enter a wrong password three times, “NOT
RELEASE” is automatically selected. In this case, press
ENTER. Then eject the disc.
REV. MODE
FM MODE
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
• If you want to change a password, enter a new four digit
number in this step.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Information
• When using an 8 cm disc, place it on the inner circle of the disc
tray.
Learning More about This System
• On some DVD, SVCD, or VCD discs, the actual operations
may be different from what is explained in this manual, due to
the programming and disc structure; such differences are not a
malfunction of this System.
• Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When
you play back such a disc, “LR ONLY” appears on the display
and the System plays back the left front and right front signals.
• 3D Phonic setting is also applied to the optical digital output
signals through the DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal.
• When using Resume on SVCD or VCD with PBC, the
playback might start on a position slightly different from
where you have stopped.
Getting Started (see pages 3 to 6)
Changing the Scanning Mode
• To enjoy the progressive video picture, connect a TV with the
progressive video input using component video cord.
Before Operating the System (see pages 7 to 9)
Playable Disc Types:
• If you play back an NTSC disc with this setting set to “PAL,”
you can watch the playback pictures (the disc will be
reproduced using “PAL 60” format), but the TV screen may
roll over upward and downward rapidly.
• If you play back a PAL disc with this setting set to “NTSC,”
you can watch the playback pictures, but the following
symptoms may occur:
• You can use Resume only for the DVD/SVCD/VCD except
for some discs—depending how the disc is programmed.
– The items on the disc menu will be blurred, and be shown
slightly shifted when highlighted.
– The aspect ratio of the picture may differ from the original
aspect ratio.
Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments
(see pages 15 to 17)
Adjusting the Volume:
• Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting
the headphones.
– The picture movement is not smooth.
Daily Operations—Playback (see pages 10 to 14)
Listening to the Radio:
Adjusting the Sound:
• This function also affects the sound through the headphones.
• If you store a new station into an occupied preset number, the
previously stored station in that number will be erased.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the preset stations will be erased in a few days. If this
happens, preset the stations again.
Setting the Clock:
• “0:00” will flash on the display until you set the clock.
• The clock may gain or lose 1 to 2 minutes per month. If this
happens, reset the clock.
Unique DVD/VCD Operations (see pages 18 to 20)
Playing Back a Tape:
• During slow-motion playback, no sound will be reproduced.
• While zoomed in, the picture may look coarse.
• It is not recommended to use the C-120 or longer tapes. These
tapes easily jams in the pinch rollers and the capstans, and may
cause characteristic deterioration.
Advanced Disc Operations (see pages 21 to 23)
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play:
• If you try to program a 100th track, “MEM FULL” appears on
the display.
Playing Back a Disc:
• For MP3/WMA playback...
– This System cannot play “packet write” discs.
– MP3/WMA discs are required a longer readout time than
regular CDs. (It depends on the complexity of the group/file
configuration.)
– Some MP3/WMA files cannot be played back and will be
skipped. This result from their recording processes and
conditions.
• While programming steps...
Your entry will be ignored if you have tried to program an item
number that does not exist on the disc (for example, selecting
track 14 on a disc that only has 12 tracks).
Playing at Random—Random Play:
– When making MP3/WMA discs, use ISO 9660 Level 1 or
Level 2 for the disc format.
– This System can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the letter
case—upper/lower).
• The 4 button does not work for skipping chapters or tracks,
but only work for going back to the beginning of the current
chapter or track.
– It is recommended that you make each MP3 file at a
sampling rate of 44.1 kHz and at bit rate of 128 kbps. This
System cannot play back files made at bit rate of less than 64
kbps.
– This System can recognize the total of 1000 tracks and of 99
groups (each group can contain up to 150 tracks). Those
exceeding the maximum number cannot be recognized.
– Playback order of MP3/WMA tracks may be different from
the one you have intended while recording (see page 40). If
a folder does not include MP3/WMA tracks, they are
ignored.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On-Screen Disc Operations (see pages 24 to 28)
• For JPEG files playback...
– It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480
resolution. (If a file has been recorded at a resolution of
more than 640 x 480, it will take a long time to be shown.)
– This System can play only baseline JPEG files. Progressive
JPEG files or lossless JPEG files cannot be played.
Timer Operations (see pages 31 to 32)
• When using an external component—“AUX” for the playback
source, set the timer built in the component at the same time.
• Before turning off the power, do not forget to prepare the
required materials—a disc or tape for playback and a
recordable tape for recording.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the timer will be canceled. You need to set the clock
first, then the timer again.
• Without stopping the recording, you cannot change the source
after Recording Timer start recording.
• If you set the Sleep Timer after Daily Timer starts playing the
selected source, Daily Timer is canceled.
• If you set the Sleep Timer after Recording Timer starts
recording, Recording Timer is canceled, but recording
continues until Sleep Timer shuts off the power.
Baseline JPEG format:
Used for digital cameras, web,
etc.
Progressive JPEG format: Used for web.
Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely used
now.
– This System may not play back JPEG files properly which
are recorded by the devices other than digital still camera.
– If progressive or lossless JPEG files are played back, a black
screen appears. In this case, stop playback and select a
baseline JPEG file. Note that it may take a long time to
select another file.
Setup Menu Operations (see pages 33 to 38)
LANGUAGE:
Advanced Tape Operations (see pages 29 to 30)
Recording on a Tape:
• The recording level is automatically set correctly. Thus, you
can adjust the sound you are actually listening to without
affecting the recording level.
• When the language you have selected for “MENU
LANGUAGE,” “AUDIO LANGUAGE,” or “SUBTITLE” is
not recorded on a disc, the original language is used as the
initial language.
PICTURE—MONITOR TYPE:
• There is leader tape which cannot be recorded onto at the start
and end of cassette tapes. Thus, when recording CDs or radio
broadcasts, wind the leader tape first to ensure that the
recording will be made without any music part lost.
• If you start recording with no cassette inserted, “NO TAPE”
appears on the display. If a protected tape has been inserted,
“NO REC” appears.
• When using Reverse Mode for recording, start recording in the
forward (3) direction first; otherwise, recording will stop
when only one side (reverse) of the tape is recorded.
• Even if “4:3 PS” is selected, the screen size may become 4:3
letter box with some DVD Video discs. This depends on how
the discs are recorded.
• When you select “16:9” for a picture whose aspect ratio is 4:3,
the picture slightly changes due to the process for converting
the picture width.
AUDIO—DOWN MIX:
• This setting is not effective when DTS multi-channel software
is played back.
OTHERS—ON SCREEN GUIDE:
• You can also change Reverse Mode setting (
after starting recording.
and
)
• Setup Menus and on-screen bar will be displayed (and
recorded) even though this function is set to “OFF.”
Subtitles and the information for zooming in always appear on
the display regardless of this setting.
• You cannot open or close the disc tray while recording.
Synchronized Disc Recording:
• When the tape reaches its end in the forward direction (3)
during recording with Reverse Mode set to
, the last tune
will be re-recorded at the beginning of the reverse side.
MP3/WMA/JPEG groups/tracks configuration
This System plays back the tracks as follows.
Hierarchy
Level 1
ROOT
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
9
01
03
04
10
3
7
02
4
5
6
8
11
12
05
1
2
Group with its play order
Track with its play order
01
1
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the System
Maintenance
To get the best performance of the System, keep your discs,
tapes, and mechanism clean
.
• Stains should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the System is
heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-diluted
neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean with a dry
cloth.
• Since the System may deteriorate in quality, become damaged
or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the following:
– DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.
Handling discs
• When removing the disc from its case, hold it at the edge while
pressing the center hole lightly.
• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc.
• Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping.
• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc.
• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, temperature extremes, and
moisture.
– DO NOT wipe it strongly.
– DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.
– DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as insecticides
to it.
• DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact for
a long time.
To clean the disc:
Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to
edge.
Handling cassette tapes
• If the tape is loose in its cassette, take up the slack by inserting
a pencil in one of the reels and rotate it.
– If the tape is loose, it may get stretched, cut, or caught in the
cassette.
• Be careful not to touch the tape surface.
• Avoid the following places to store the tape—in dusty places,
in direct sunlight or heat, in moist areas, on a TV or speaker,
or near a magnet.
To keep the best recording and playback sound quality
• Use a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to clean the heads,
capstans, and pinch rollers.
• Use a head demagnetizer (available at electronics and audio
shops) to demagnetize the heads (when the System turned off).
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MP3/WMA or JPEG tracks are not played back.
] The inserted disc may include both type of tracks (MP3/
WMA files and JPEG files). In this case, you can only play
back the files selected by the “FILE TYPE” setting (see
page 35).
Troubleshooting
If you are having a problem with your System, check this list
for a possible solution before calling for service.
] You have changed the “FILE TYPE” setting after you
inserted a disc. In this case, reload the disc.
General:
Adjustments or settings are suddenly canceled before
“NO AUDIO” appears.
] This System cannot play back illegally produced DVD
Audio discs.
you finish.
] There is a time limit. Repeat the procedure again.
Operations are disabled.
“LR ONLY” appears.
] The built-in microprocessor may malfunction due to
external electrical interference. Unplug the AC power cord
and then plug it back in.
] Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When
you play back such a disc, this System plays back the left
front and right front signals only.
Unable to operate the System from the remote control.
] The path between the remote control and the remote sensor
on the System is blocked.
The disc sound is discontinuous.
] The disc is scratched or dirty.
] The batteries are exhausted.
The disc tray does not open or close.
] The AC power cord is not plugged in.
] Child Lock is in use (see page 23).
No sound is heard.
] Speaker connections are incorrect or loose.
] Headphones are connected.
Tape Operations:
The cassette holder cannot be opened.
] Power supply from the AC power cord has been cut off
while the tape was running. Turn on the System.
No picture appears on the screen.
] The video cord connections are incorrect or loose.
No picture is displayed on the TV, the picture is blurred,
or the picture is divided into two parts.
] The System is connected to a TV which does not support
progressive scanning.
Recordings:
Impossible to record.
The left and right edges of the picture are missing on the
screen.
] Small tabs on the back of the cassette are removed. Cover
the holes with adhesive tape.
] Select “4:3 LB” for “MONITOR TYPE” (see page 34).
Timer Operations:
Daily Timer and Recording Timer do not work.
] The System has been turned on when the on-time comes.
Timer starts working only when the System is turned off.
Radio Operations:
Hard to listen to broadcasts because of noise.
] Antennas connections are incorrect or loose.
] The AM loop antenna is too close to the System.
] The FM antenna is not properly extended and positioned.
Daily Timer does not start playback.
] The disc loaded is a DVD video. Change the disc.
] Title/group number and chapter/track number are not
entered while setting the Daily Timer. Do not skip these
steps when you want to play a disc using Daily Timer.
Disc Operations:
The disc does not play.
] The disc is placed upside down. Place the disc with the label
Setup Menu Operations:
side up.
No subtitle appears on the display though you have
selected the initial subtitle language.
] Some DVDs are programmed to always display no subtitle
initially. If this happens, select the subtitle after starting play
(see page 18).
ID3 Tag on an MP3/WMA disc cannot be shown.
] There are two types of ID3 Tag—Version 1 and Version 2.
This System can only show ID3 Tag Version 1.
MP3/WMA/JPEG groups and tracks are not played
back as you expect.
] The playing order is determined when the disc was
recorded. It depends on the writing application.
Audio language is different from the one you have
selected as the initial audio language.
] Some DVDs are programmed to always use the original
language initially. If this happens, select the audio language
after starting play (see page 19).
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Code List
JW
KA
KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
Javanese
Georgian
Kazakh
SL
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
Afar
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Ameharic
Arabic
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean (KOR)
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati
Sesotho
Sundanese
Swedish
Swahili
Tamil
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
ST
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
SU
SV
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Maori
Telugu
Tajik
Bislama
Bengali, Bangla
Tibetan
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DA
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU
FA
FI
LV
MG
MI
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Breton
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
Catalan
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE
NL
NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Danish
Bhutani
Greek
Malay (MAY)
Maltese
TT
TW
UK
UR
UZ
VI
Twi
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque
Burmese
Nauru
Ukrainian
Urdu
Nepali
Uzbek
Persian
Dutch
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Wolof
Finnish
Norwegian
Occitan
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZU
FJ
Fiji
FO
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
Faroese
Frisian
(Afan) Oromo
Oriya
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu
Irish
Panjabi
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
PL
Polish
PS
Pashto, Pushto
Portuguese
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
PT
QU
RM
RN
RO
RU
RW
SA
Hindi
HR
HU
HY
IA
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Rumanian
Russian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
IE
SD
Sindhi
IK
SG
Sangho
IN
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Yiddish
SH
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
IS
SI
IW
JI
SK
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Country/Area Codes List
√
DK
DM
DO
DZ
EC
EE
EG
EH
ER
ES
Denmark
Dominica
Dominican Republic
Algeria
Ecuador
Estonia
Egypt
Western Sahara
Eritrea
Spain
JO
JP
Jordan
Japan
Kenya
Kyrgyzstan
Cambodia
AD
AE
AF
AG
AI
AL
AM
AN
AO
AQ
AR
AS
AT
AU
AW
AZ
BA
BB
BD
BE
BF
Andorra
United Arab Emirates
Afghanistan
Antigua and Barbuda
Anguilla
Albania
Armenia
Netherlands Antilles
Angola
Antarctica
Argentina
American Samoa
Austria
Australia
KE
KG
KH
KI
KM
KN
KP
Kiribati
Comoros
Saint Kitts and Nevis
Korea, Democratic People’s
Republic of
Korea, Republic of
Kuwait
Cayman Islands
Kazakhstan
Lao People’s Democratic
Republic
KR
KW
KY
KZ
LA
ET
FI
FJ
Ethiopia
Finland
Fiji
FK
FM
FO
FR
FX
GA
GB
GD
GE
GF
GH
GI
GL
GM
GN
GP
GQ
GR
GS
Falkland Islands (Malvinas)
Micronesia (Federated States of)
Faroe Islands
France
France, Metropolitan
Gabon
United Kingdom
Grenada
Georgia
French Guiana
Ghana
Gibraltar
Greenland
Gambia
Guinea
Guadeloupe
Equatorial Guinea
Greece
South Georgia and the South
Sandwich
Guatemala
Guam
Guinea-Bissau
Guyana
Hong Kong
Heard Island and McDonald
Islands
Honduras
Croatia
Haiti
Hungary
Indonesia
Ireland
Israel
India
British Indian Ocean Territory
Iraq
Iran (Islamic Republic of)
Iceland
Italy
Jamaica
Aruba
Azerbaijan
Bosnia and Herzegovina
Barbados
Bangladesh
Belgium
Burkina Faso
Bulgaria
Bahrain
Burundi
Benin
Bermuda
Brunei Darussalam
Bolivia
Brazil
Bahamas
Bhutan
Bouvet Island
Botswana
Belarus
Belize
Canada
Cocos (Keeling) Islands
Central African Republic
Congo
Switzerland
Côte d’Ivoire
Cook Islands
Chile
Cameroon
China
Colombia
Costa Rica
Cuba
Cape Verde
Christmas Island
Cyprus
Czech Republic
Germany
Djibouti
LB
LC
LI
LK
LR
LS
LT
LU
LV
LY
MA
MC
MD
MG
MH
ML
Lebanon
Saint Lucia
Liechtenstein
Sri Lanka
Liberia
Lesotho
Lithuania
Luxembourg
Latvia
Libyan Arab Jamahiriya
Morocco
Monaco
BG
BH
BI
BJ
BM
BN
BO
BR
BS
BT
BV
BW
BY
BZ
CA
CC
CF
CG
CH
CI
CK
CL
CM
CN
CO
CR
CU
CV
CX
CY
CZ
DE
DJ
Moldova, Republic of
Madagascar
Marshall Islands
Mali
MM Myanmar
MN
MO
MP
MQ
MR
MS
MT
MU
MV
Mongolia
Macau
GT
GU
GW
GY
HK
HM
Northern Mariana Islands
Martinique
Mauritania
Montserrat
Malta
HN
HR
HT
HU
ID
IE
IL
IN
IO
IQ
IR
IS
IT
Mauritius
Maldives
MW Malawi
MX
MY
MZ
NA
NC
NE
NF
NG
NI
Mexico
Malaysia
Mozambique
Namibia
New Caledonia
Niger
Norfolk Island
Nigeria
Nicaragua
Netherlands
Norway
NL
NO
JM
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NP
NR
NU
NZ
OM
PA
PE
PF
PG
PH
PK
PL
PM
PN
PR
PT
PW
PY
QA
RE
RO
RU
RW
SA
SB
Nepal
Nauru
Niue
New Zealand
Oman
Panama
Peru
French Polynesia
Papua New Guinea
Philippines
Pakistan
Poland
Saint Pierre and Miquelon
Pitcairn
Puerto Rico
Portugal
Palau
Paraguay
Qatar
Réunion
Romania
SE
SG
SH
SI
Sweden
Singapore
Saint Helena
Slovenia
Svalbard and Jan Mayen
Slovakia
Sierra Leone
San Marino
Senegal
Somalia
Suriname
Sao Tome and Principe
El Salvador
Syrian Arab Republic
Swaziland
Turks and Caicos Islands
Chad
French Southern Territories
Togo
Thailand
Tajikistan
Tokelau
Turkmenistan
Tunisia
Tonga
TT
Trinidad and Tobago
Tuvalu
Taiwan
Tanzania, United Republic of
Ukraine
Uganda
United States Minor Outlying
Islands
United States
Uruguay
TV
TW
TZ
UA
UG
UM
SJ
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SR
ST
SV
SY
SZ
TC
TD
TF
TG
TH
TJ
US
UY
UZ
VA
VC
VE
VG
VI
VN
VU
WF
WS
YE
YT
YU
ZA
ZM
ZR
ZW
Uzbekistan
Vatican City State (Holy See)
Saint Vincent and the Grenadines
Venezuela
Virgin Islands (British)
Virgin Islands (U.S.)
Vietnam
Vanuatu
Wallis and Futuna Islands
Samoa
Yemen
Mayotte
Yugoslavia
South Africa
Russian Federation
Rwanda
Saudi Arabia
Solomon Islands
Seychelles
Sudan
TK
TM
TN
TO
TP
TR
Zambia
Zaire
Zimbabwe
SC
SD
East Timor
Turkey
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals
DIGITAL AUDIO
OUTPUT
Output Signals
Playback disc
DVD Video
STREAM/PCM
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
PCM ONLY
with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Linear PCM
with 96 kHz, Linear PCM
with Dolby Digital
with DTS
Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
DVD Audio
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with 48/96/192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit Linear PCM
with 44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz,
16/20/24 bit Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with Dolby Digital
with DTS
Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
SVCD, VCD, CD
CD with DTS
DTS bitstream
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
MP3/WMA disc
32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
*While playing some DVDs, digital signals may be emitted at 20 bits or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DVD
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal if the discs are not copy-protected.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Parts Index
Refer to the pages to see how to use the buttons and controls.
Amplifier section
Output Power:
40 W (20 W + 20 W) at 4 Ω (10% THD)
AUX: 400 mV/50 kΩ
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT:
Remote control
Audio Input
Digital output:
–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm 30 nm)
STANDBY/ON
Video output:
Color system:
VIDEO (composite):
AUDIO
SUB TITLE ANGLE
1
ZOOM
4
2
DVD LEVEL
5
3
VFP
6
10
NTSC/PAL selectable
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
4 Ω – 16 Ω
17
11, 12, 13,
16, 18–21,
26, 37
CLOCK/
TIMER
REV. MODE
FM MODE
S-VIDEO: Y (luminance)
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
9
7
17, 31
SET
C (chrominance, burst)
COMPONENT: (Y)
(PB/PR)
Speakers/Impedance:
10
10
TOP MENU
MENU
SET UP
ENTER
14, 20,
25–31, 33
ON SCREEN
CANCEL
RETURN
Tuner section
DVD/CD
TAPE
10, 13, 22, 28
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
PLAY
MODE
FM tuning range:
87.50 MHz – 108.00 MHz
522 kHz – 1 629 kHz
11, 13,
AM (MW) tuning range:
20–23, 28
+
GROUP/TITLE
SLOW – SLOW
BASS/
3D
15
15
Tape section
Frequency response:
Wow and flutter:
DISPLAY
RHYTHM AX
PHONIC TREBLE
9, 17
14
60 Hz – 14 000 Hz
0.15% (WRMS)
DIMMER
FADE
MUTING
10, 15
16
11, 16–20,
VOLUME
Disc player section
23
RM-SUXP450U REMOTE CONTROL
Playable disc: DVD Video/DVD Audio
CD/VCD/SVCD
15
20
CD-R/CD-RW (CD/SVCD/VCD/MP3/
WMA/JPEG format)
DVD-R/DVD-RW (Video format)
Dynamic range:
Horizontal resolution:
Wow and flutter:
90 dB
500 lines
Immeasurable
Main unit
12
Speakers
Speaker units:
Impedance:
Full-range:
10 cm cone x 1
4 Ω
Dimensions (approx.):
145 mm x 230 mm x 191 mm
(W/H/D)
8
Mass (approx.):
1.8 kg each
14
15
Remote
sensor
Supplied Accessories
See page 3.
STANDBY/ON
DVD/CD
3D
PHONIC
RHYTHM AX
AUX
10
VOLUME
General
Power requirement:
Power consumption:
TAPE
FM/AM
AC 240 V
, 50 Hz
10, 15
10–13,
22, 28
65 W (at operation)
1.5 W (on standby)
170 mm x 230 mm x 311 mm
(W/H/D)
REC
DOWN
UP
30
Dimensions (approx.):
Mass (approx.):
13, 23
10
4.8 kg
11, 13
PHONES
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
EN
0504AIMMDWJEM
© 2004 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|